JP2015173794A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine capable of suitably increasing the degree of attention to a performance.SOLUTION: In a Pachinko machine, a movable performance unit is provided at a back side of a game board 60a. The movable performance unit includes a first decoration device and a second decoration device, and the respective decoration devices include link mechanisms. Each of the decoration devices includes a body part, and a first link part and a second link part rotatably provided to the body part. In the first decoration device, the second link part includes a moving performance part 243b, and the moving performance part 243b can be moved from a retracted position to a performance position PA2 by turning movement of the respective link parts. In the second decoration device 233, the second link part includes a rotating performance part 403b, and the rotating performance part 403b can be moved from the retracted position to a performance position PB2 by turning movement of the respective link parts.

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine has a picture display device that displays a variation of the picture triggered by entering a pitching section provided in the game area, and various effects are displayed on the display screen of this picture display device. In some cases, the attention to the game is improved.

  In addition, for example, by providing an effect means composed of a light emitting part, a movable body, etc. around the display screen, and by giving a predetermined correspondence between the effect by the display of the variation of the pattern and the effect by the effect means, An improved gaming machine has been proposed (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP 2002-78904 A

  However, in order to improve the degree of attention to the production by the production means, there is room for improvement in the production.

  The present invention has been made in view of the above-described circumstances and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of suitably improving the degree of attention to an effect.

  Hereinafter, means for solving the above problems will be described.

The invention described in claim 1
A main body attached to a predetermined attachment object;
A production arm that is pivotally connected to the main body via an arm shaft,
Provided on the turning tip side of the effect arm, and as the effect arm rotates, it is possible to move to an effect position that is visible from the front of the gaming machine and a retreat position that is retracted from the effect position. A moving direction department,
A game machine provided with a production device having
The moving effect part is rotatably connected to the effect arm via an effect shaft part,
The stage device is
An arm driving section for rotating the effect arm with respect to the main body section about the arm shaft section;
An effect drive unit that rotates the movement effect unit with respect to the effect arm with the effect axis unit as an axis,
It is characterized by having.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to suitably improve the degree of attention to the production.

It is a perspective view which shows the pachinko machine in this embodiment. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which expands and shows the main structures of a pachinko machine. It is a front view of a game board unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board unit from the left front. It is a front view of a movable production unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a movable production | presentation unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 1st decoration apparatus. It is a schematic front view of a 1st decoration apparatus. It is a schematic diagram for demonstrating operation | movement of the 1st link part of a 1st decoration apparatus, and a 2nd link part. It is a disassembled perspective view of the main-body part of a 1st decoration apparatus. It is an operation | movement figure in case a 1st decoration device transfers to a production | presentation state from a retracted state. It is an operation | movement figure in case a 1st decoration device transfers to a retracted state from an effect state. It is a disassembled perspective view of the 2nd link part of a 1st decoration apparatus. It is a figure for demonstrating the deformation | transformation of the movement production | presentation part of a 1st decoration apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 2nd decoration apparatus. It is a schematic front view of a 2nd decoration apparatus. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 2nd link part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a main-body part. It is a figure which shows the internal structure of a main-body part. It is an operation | movement figure in case a 2nd decoration device transfers to a retracted state from an effect state. It is a block diagram which shows the electric constitution of a pachinko machine. It is explanatory drawing for demonstrating the content of the various counters used for a success / failure lottery. It is a flowchart which shows the production | presentation process performed with a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the operation | movement process of the 2nd decoration device performed with a display control apparatus.

  Hereinafter, an embodiment of a pachinko gaming machine (hereinafter referred to as “pachinko machine”), which is a type of gaming machine, will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine 10 viewed from the front side, and FIGS. 2 and 3 are perspective views showing the main configuration of the pachinko machine 10 in an exploded manner. In FIG. 2, the configuration in the game area PE of the pachinko machine 10 is omitted for convenience.

  As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 includes an outer frame 11 that forms an outer shell of the pachinko machine 10, and a gaming machine main part 12 attached to the outer frame 11.

  The outer frame 11 is configured by connecting wooden plates to four sides and has a rectangular frame shape. By attaching and fixing the outer frame 11 to the island facility, the pachinko machine 10 is installed in the game hall. In the pachinko machine 10, the outer frame 11 is not an essential configuration, and the outer frame 11 may be provided on the island facility of the game arcade.

  The gaming machine main part 12 is supported by the outer frame 11 so as to be opened and closed. Specifically, the upper support bracket 17 is fixed to a connection portion between the upper frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11, and further, a lower portion is connected to the connection portion between the lower frame portion and the left frame portion in the outer frame 11. Side support fittings 18 are provided. The upper support bracket 17 and the lower support bracket 18 form a support mechanism. The support mechanism causes the gaming machine main unit 12 to turn the left side of the pachinko machine 10 in the front view with respect to the outer frame 11. The right side can be turned to the front side of the pachinko machine 10 with the turning tip side (see FIGS. 2 and 3).

  As shown in FIG. 2, the gaming machine main part 12 includes an inner frame 13 as a base body, a front door frame 14 arranged in front of the inner frame 13, and a back pack arranged behind the inner frame 13. Unit 15. The inner frame 13 of the gaming machine main part 12 is supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the outer frame 11. Specifically, the inner frame 13 can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in front view.

  A front door frame 14 is rotatably supported by the inner frame 13 and can be rotated forward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view. Further, the back pack unit 15 is rotatably supported on the inner frame 13, and can be rotated rearward with the left side as a rotation base end side and the right side as a rotation front end side in a front view ( (See FIG. 3).

<Front door frame 14>
Next, the front door frame 14 will be described. As shown in FIG. 2, the front door frame 14 is mainly composed of a synthetic resin frame body 20 whose outer shape is substantially the same as that of the outer frame 11, and covers almost the entire front surface of the inner frame 13. Yes. A substantially elliptical window portion 21 is formed in the central portion of the frame body 20 so that a substantially entire game area PE described later can be viewed from the front. The window portion 21 is formed by the glass unit 22. The front door frame 14 is closed from the back side.

  The glass unit 22 includes a plurality of glass panels 23 having transparency and a glass holder that holds the glass panels 23. The glass holder is formed with a partition portion for partitioning the holding region of the glass panel 23 in the front-rear direction, and the two glass panels 23 face each other in the front-rear direction with the partition portion interposed therebetween. That is, by securing a predetermined gap between the glass panels 23, the gaming area PE is covered by the glass panels 23 from the front side of the pachinko machine 10 while avoiding interference between the glass panels 23. It is in a state.

  Note that it is not always necessary to unitize both glass panels 23 using a glass holder, and each glass panel 23 may be individually attached to the frame 20. Furthermore, the number of glass panels is arbitrary, and may be one or three or more. However, from the viewpoint of improving safety and security, it is preferable to employ a plurality of glass panels and to make the glass panels face each other across a predetermined gap. Incidentally, it is also possible to employ a synthetic resin panel member having transparency instead of the glass panel.

  As shown in FIG. 1, light emitting means such as various lamps are provided around the glass unit 22 (specifically, the window portion 21). For example, an annular illumination part 26 incorporating a light emitting means such as an LED is provided along the periphery of the window part 21. In the annular illumination part 26, lighting or blinking is performed according to a change in the gaming state at the time of big hit or at a predetermined reach. In addition, an error display lamp unit 27 that is turned on at the time of a predetermined error is provided in the center of the annular illumination unit 26 and at the uppermost part of the pachinko machine 10, and a prize that is turned on while the prize ball is being paid out on the left and right sides. A sphere lamp portion 28 is provided. Further, a speaker unit 29 is provided at a position close to the left and right prize ball lamp units 28 to output sound effects corresponding to the gaming state.

  Below the window portion 21 in the front door frame 14 (frame body 20), an upper bulging portion 31 and a lower bulging portion 32 that bulge toward the front side are arranged side by side. An upper pan 33 that opens upward is provided inside the upper bulging portion 31, and a lower pan 34 that also opens upward is provided inside the lower bulging portion 32. The upper plate 33 has a function of temporarily storing game balls paid out from a payout device described later and guiding them to the game ball launching mechanism described later while aligning them in a line. In addition, the lower tray 34 has a function of storing game balls that become surplus in the upper tray 33.

  A game ball launching handle 41 is provided on the right side of the lower bulging portion 32 so as to protrude toward the front side. By operating the game ball launch handle 41, a game ball is launched from a game ball launch mechanism described later.

  As shown in FIG. 2, a passage forming unit 45 is attached to the back surface of the front door frame 14. The passage forming unit 45 is formed of a synthetic resin, and has a front door side upper dish passage that leads to the upper dish 33 and a front door side lower dish path that leads to the lower dish 34. In the passage forming unit 45, a receiving port portion that protrudes rearward and is opened upward is formed at the upper corner of the passage forming unit 45, and the entrance portion of the front door side upper plate passage is formed by dividing the receiving port portion into left and right by a partition wall. The portion and the entrance portion of the front door side lower dish passage are partitioned. The game balls that have entered the front door side upper dish passage are guided to the upper dish 33, and the game balls that have entered the front door side lower dish path are guided to the lower dish 34.

  Projecting shafts are provided at the upper end and the lower end of the rotation base end side of the back surface of the front door frame 14. These projecting shafts constitute an assembly mechanism for the inner frame 13. In addition, a plurality of hooks 49 extending rearward are arranged in parallel in the vertical direction on the rotating front end side on the back surface of the front door frame 14. These hooks 49 constitute a locking mechanism for the inner frame 13.

<Inner frame 13>
Next, the inner frame 13 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. The inner frame 13 is mainly configured by an inner frame base 50 whose outer shape is substantially rectangular like the outer frame 11. The height dimension of the inner frame base 50 is set slightly smaller than the height dimension of the outer frame 11. The inner frame base 50 is arranged close to the upper frame portion of the outer frame 11, and a slight gap is formed between the lower frame portion of the outer frame 11 and the inner frame base 50. A curtain plate is attached to the outer frame 11 so as to close the gap. The curtain plate is disposed below the inner frame base 50 (specifically, the lower end portion thereof), and the inner frame base 50 rests on the curtain plate when the inner frame 13 is closed with respect to the outer frame 11. It becomes.

  Support metal fittings 51 and 52 are attached to the upper end portion and the lower end portion of the inner base 50 on the front side of the rotation base. Shaft holes are formed in the support fittings 51 and 52, and the front door frame 14 is rotatably supported with respect to the inner frame 13 by inserting the projection shaft of the front door frame 14 into the shaft holes. ing.

  Insertion holes for inserting the metal fittings 49 provided on the back surface of the front door frame 14 are provided on the rotation front side of the front surface of the inner frame base 50. The pachinko machine 10 is configured such that a locking device 55 for locking the inner frame 13 and the front door frame 14 is hidden behind the inner frame 13. Therefore, the front door frame 14 is locked to the inner frame 13 so as not to be opened by the hook metal 49 being locked to the locking device 55 (specifically, the front door hook receiving member) through the insertion hole. The locking device 55 has an inner frame collar member 57 extending rearward of the inner frame 13. When these inner frame hook members 57 are hooked on the hook receiving member 19 of the outer frame 11, the gaming machine main part 12 is locked in a closed state with respect to the outer frame 11.

  A cylinder lock 58 for performing an unlocking operation of the locking device 55 is installed at the lower right corner of the inner frame base 50. The cylinder lock 58 is integrated with the locking device 55. When the key inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 58 is turned to the right, the lock of the front door frame 14 with respect to the inner frame 13 is released, and the cylinder lock 58 is inserted into the key hole of the cylinder lock 58. The locking device 55 is configured so that the locking of the inner frame 13 with respect to the outer frame 11 is released when the key is turned counterclockwise.

  A game board housing portion 53 for housing the game board unit 60 is formed in the central portion of the inner frame base 50. The game board housing portion 53 is a recessed portion that is recessed to the rear of the gaming machine in accordance with the outer shape of the game board unit 60. The game board unit 60 is manually locked in a state of being fitted into the game board housing portion 53 from the front of the gaming machine. It is fixed by the mechanism. A substantially rectangular window hole 54 is formed at the bottom of the game board housing portion 53, and the rear configuration of the game board unit 60 (a rear block 60 b described later) protrudes behind the inner frame 13 through the window hole 54. ing. The window hole 54 is almost entirely covered from the front of the gaming machine by the game board unit 60 mounted on the inner frame base 50.

<Game board unit 60>
The game board unit 60 is provided on the back side of the game board 60a formed mainly of a plate made of a transparent synthetic resin material, and various game parts (variable display device, control device, movable type) to be described later. And a rear block 60b on which a light emitting decorative member and the like are mounted on the block base 136 are integrated, and the front portion of the rear block 60b is visible through the game board 60a.

  On the front surface of the game board 60a, the above-described game area PE in which game balls flow down is formed. As already described, the game area PE is covered with the glass unit 22 (specifically, the rear glass panel 23). In the glass unit 22, the gap between the rear glass panel 23 and the front surface of the game board 60a is slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, that is, the game balls flowing down the game area PE are the same in the game area PE. It is arranged so that it is not lined up back and forth at a point. Thereby, the ball blockage in the game area PE is suppressed. Note that the game board 60a (specifically, a plate) is not limited to being made of synthetic resin, and may be made of wood.

  Hereinafter, the game board unit 60 (particularly, various configurations arranged in the game area PE of the game board 60a) will be described with reference to FIG. 4, FIG. 5, and FIG. 4 is a front view of the game board unit 60, FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the game board unit 60 viewed from the right front, and FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the game board unit 60 viewed from the left front. In FIGS. 5 and 6, the configuration that can be visually recognized through the game board 60 a is also displayed by a two-point difference line, and is in a state close to an overview when the game board unit 60 is actually viewed.

  As shown in FIGS. 4, 5, and 6, the game board 60 a is formed with a plurality of large and small openings penetrating in its own thickness direction (front-rear direction). Each opening is provided with a general winning port 61, a variable winning device 64, operating ports 62 and 63, a through gate 65, and the like. When game balls enter the general winning port 61, the variable winning device 64, and the operation ports 62, 63, the game balls are detected by detection sensors (not shown) provided corresponding to the respective winning portions, and the detection results thereof. Based on the above, a predetermined number of award balls (payout of game balls) and the like are given to the player. In addition, an out port 68 is provided at the lowermost part of the game board 60 a, and game balls that have not entered various ball entering parts and the like are discharged from the game area PE through the out port 68. In the following description, in order to clearly distinguish the game ball from entering the out port 68, the game ball entering the general game port 61, the variable game device 64, and the operation ports 62 and 63 is also referred to as “winning”. Express.

  The game board 60a is provided with a large number of nails for distributing and adjusting the flow path of the game ball as appropriate, and various members (functions) such as a windmill. The flow paths of the game balls are differentiated by various configurations such as nails and windmills, and are adjusted so that winnings to the above-described general winning opening 61 and the like occur with an appropriate probability.

  A central opening 72 is formed at the center of the game board 60a, and a transparent opening cover (not shown) is attached so as to cover the center opening 72 from the back side of the game board 60a. The variable display unit 67 and the like belonging to the back block 60b is located behind the central opening 72, and the variable display unit 67 and the like can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 72 (opening cover). .

  Incidentally, the game board 60a has an opaque sheet material stacked on the transparent plate material. This sheet material is affixed to the front plate surface of a transparent plate material and blocks the line of sight to the back side of the game board 60a. For this reason, the range that can be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine in the back block 60b is limited to the portion exposed to the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 72 of the gaming board 60a.

  In the game board 60a, the operation ports 62 and 63, the through gate 65, and the like are disposed around the central opening 72. The operation ports 62 and 63 are configured by an upper operation port 62 disposed below the variable display unit 67 and a lower operation port 63 disposed directly below the upper operation port 62, and in particular, the lower operation port. The (lottery opportunity entry part) 63 is provided with an electric accessory 71 as an opening / closing type entry assist device (entrance assisting means) or an opening / closing member (opening / closing means). The electric accessory 71 includes a pair of left and right movable pieces and a solenoid-type drive unit that drives the movable pieces, and an open state (assist state) in which a ball can be easily or easily entered into the lower working port 63. Then, it is possible to switch to a closed state (non-auxiliary state) in which the same ball cannot be or is difficult.

  The through gate 65 is arranged on the upstream side of the lower operating port 63 (specifically, on the side of the variable display unit 67), and the winning is made by lottery triggered by the passage of the game ball through the through gate 65. In such a case, the electric accessory 71 is switched from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time.

  When a ball enters the upper working port 62, three game balls are paid out. When a ball enters the lower working port 63, four game balls are paid out. However, the number of game balls to be paid out is not limited to the above. However, in order to increase the advantage of the lower working port 63 with respect to the upper working port 62, it is preferable to set the number of payouts related to the lower working port 63 to be larger than the number of payouts related to the upper working port 62.

  The variable winning device (special winning device or special winning means) 64 is formed with a large winning opening leading to the back side of the game board 60a, and an opening / closing member (opening / closing means) for opening and closing the large winning opening. An open / close door is provided. The open / close door can be switched between an open state (assist state) in which a game ball can be entered or facilitated and a closed state (non-assist state) in which the enter ball is impossible or difficult. The open / close door is connected to a variable prize driving unit (specifically, a solenoid) provided on the back side of the game board 60a, and the open / close door is normally kept closed and is opened / closed in an internal lottery. When winning the transition to the execution mode (opening and closing execution state) (big win: when winning the transition to a special gaming state that is more advantageous to the player than the normal gaming state) will be switched to the open state Yes.

  Here, the opening / closing execution mode is a mode to be shifted to when a big win is won. As an opening mode of the variable winning device 64 in the opening / closing execution mode, for example, a predetermined time (for example, 30 sec) or a predetermined number (for example, 10) of winnings is set as one round, and a plurality of rounds (for example, 16 rounds) is set as an upper limit. It is set so that the opening and closing of the door is repeated.

  Here, the variable display unit 67 will be supplementarily described. The variable display unit 67 has a symbol display device 75 that variably displays symbols (variation display) using a winning at the operation ports 62 and 63 as a trigger. The symbol display device 75 is configured as a liquid crystal display device including a liquid crystal display, and the display content is controlled by a display control device 170 (see FIG. 23) described later. On the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, for example, symbols are displayed side by side in the top, middle, and bottom, and these symbols are variably displayed as they are scrolled in the horizontal direction. When a big win is won, a predetermined combination of symbols is stopped and displayed on a preset active line, and the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode (special game state or big win). The symbol display device 75 is not necessarily a liquid crystal display device, and may be a dot matrix or a 7-segment type display device.

  A center frame 77 is provided on the game board 60 a so as to surround the central opening 72. The center frame 77 is fixed to the game board 60a (specifically, a plate body) from the front side thereof, and in such a fixed state, the center frame 77 stands up from the front surface of the game board 60a, thereby the center frame 77 The gap dimension between 77 and the glass unit 22 is configured to be smaller than the diameter dimension of the game ball. Thereby, it is avoided that the game ball flowing down the game area PE collides with the symbol display device 75, and the flow path of the game ball flowing down the game area PE is set to the right side of the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the center frame 77). The route is divided roughly into the route that detours from and the route that detours from the left side.

  On the upper surface of the frame portion constituting the lower portion of the center frame 77, a stage portion is formed on which the game ball can roll to the left and right. The game balls that have flowed in from the inflow ports formed in the left and right left frame portions of the center frame 77 are discharged onto the stage portion through a warp passage formed in the center frame 77. The stage portion is configured such that the game ball that has reached the stage portion is relatively easy to flow into the upper operation port 62, and the player's attention to the movement of the game ball on the stage portion is improved. Contributing to

  Here, in the present embodiment, as described above, the central opening 72 is covered with the transparent opening cover so that the game ball reaching the stage portion does not move to the back block 60b (variable display unit 67) side. It is regulated.

  The operation ports 62 and 63 are disposed at positions close to the central opening 72 (variable display unit 67). Since it is possible to shift to the special game state with a winning at the operation ports 62 and 63 as a trigger, the player pays attention to whether or not to win the operation ports 62 and 63 and grasps whether or not to shift to the special game state. Therefore, it is considered that the symbol display device 75 is noted. Providing the operation ports 62 and 63 close to the variable display unit 67 is a device for concentrating a portion that the player wants to pay attention to around the variable display unit 67.

  A game area partition member 99 that partitions the game area PE together with the guide rail 100 described later is disposed at the right end of the game board 60a (the rotation tip of the game board unit 60 described later). The game area partition member 99 is provided with a stopper member with which a game ball flying along the main display unit 81 and the guide rail 100 collides. The stopper member is a buffer member arranged near the tip of the guide rail 100, and the game ball that collides with the stopper member flows down the game area PE after the momentum is weakened. That is, the stopper member is provided with a depressing function that weakens the momentum of the game ball that has collided.

  Here, the main display unit 81 will be supplementarily described. The main display unit 81 is embedded in the game area partition member 99, and a part thereof is arranged to face the glass unit 22. A main display portion on which a predetermined pattern or the like is displayed is provided in the facing portion. The main display unit 81 is electrically connected to a main control device described later, and the display content of the main display unit is controlled by the main control device.

  The main display unit displays a lottery result based on a winning to the upper working port 62, and a right working port displays a lottery result based on a winning to the lower working port 63. And a display unit. In the lower working port display section, the display of the variation of the pattern is performed with the winning of the upper working port 62 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the upper working port 62 The result is specified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the upper working port 62 is a winning result corresponding to the shift to the opening / closing execution mode, the variable display is stopped on the lower working port display unit, and a predetermined result is given as the stop result. After the pattern is displayed, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the lower working port display section, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the lower working port 63 as a trigger, and as a result of stopping the variation display, the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the lower working port 63 The result is specified. When the result of the internal lottery based on the winning to the lower working port 63 is a winning result corresponding to the jackpot, the change display is stopped on the display unit for the right working port, and a predetermined pattern is displayed as the stop result. After that, the mode is shifted to the opening / closing execution mode according to the result.

  Here, on the basis of winning at any one of the operation ports 62 and 63, the variation display is started in the corresponding operation port display unit, a predetermined stop result is displayed, and the variation display is stopped until the game is stopped. It corresponds to one time. However, the number of game times is not limited to the above contents. For example, a single display area is provided, and even if a winning in any of the operation ports 62 and 63 occurs, the single game area In the configuration in which the variable display is performed in the display area, the variable display is started in the single display area, and the above-mentioned variable display is stopped once in a state where a predetermined stop result is displayed. It is also possible.

  In addition to the two display units, the main display unit 81 has a through gate display unit for displaying a lottery result based on winning through the through gate 65. In the through gate display unit, the display of the variation of the picture is performed with the winning of the through gate 65 as a trigger, and the result of the internal lottery performed based on the winning of the through gate 65 is clearly shown as the result of stopping the variation display. Is done. When the result of the internal lottery based on winning through the through gate 65 is a winning result corresponding to the transition to the open state, a predetermined stop result is displayed on the through gate display unit, and a variable display is displayed. After being stopped, the state shifts to the electric power open state. In the electric combination open state, the electric combination 71 provided in the lower operation port 63 is opened in a predetermined manner.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the number of times that the game ball has passed through the through gate 65 is retained up to 4 times, but the number of suspension is displayed on the main display portion of the main display unit 81. A holding number display section is provided.

  About the main display part explained in full detail above, while being visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10 through the glass unit 22 of the front door frame 14, it is avoided that the game ball moves in front of these various display parts. Therefore, the visibility is ensured.

  Referring to FIG. 2 again, the configuration of the inner frame 13 will be described. In the inner frame base 50, below the mounting area of the game board 60a, the game is directed toward the game area PE based on the operation of the game ball launch handle 41. A game ball launching mechanism 110 that launches a ball is provided. The game ball launching mechanism 110 includes a solenoid 111 that launches a game ball placed at a predetermined launch standby position, a launch rail 112 that defines the launch direction of the game ball launched by the solenoid 111, and a game at the launch standby position. A ball feeding device 113 for supplying a ball and a base plate 114 on which the various configurations 111 to 113 are mounted are provided as main components, and the base plate 114 is fixed to the inner frame base 50 so that the inner frame base is fixed. 50 is integrated.

  The firing rail 112 is fixed to the base plate 114 in an inclined state so as to be inclined upward toward the game board 60a. A ball stopper that holds the game ball supplied from the ball feeding device 113 at the above-described firing standby position is disposed at a position closer to the downstream end portion (that is, the lower end portion) of the firing rail 112. The solenoid 111 is arranged at a position further downstream than the ball stopper.

  The solenoid 111 is electrically connected to a power source / launch control device described later. Based on the output of the electrical signal from the power supply / launch control device, the output shaft of the solenoid 111 reciprocates in the telescopic direction, so that the game ball placed at the launch standby position is on the game board 60a side, more specifically, the game. It is driven toward the guide rail 100 mounted on the board 60a.

  In the guide rail 100, the game area PE is partitioned so that the outer shape of the game area PE is substantially circular. In addition, the guide rail 100 includes an inner rail 101 and an outer rail 102 arranged so as to face each other with a gap slightly larger than the diameter of the game ball, and a single guide passage 103 is defined by both the rails 101 and 102. Is formed. The guide passage 103 has an inlet portion that is open to the tip end side (obliquely downward) of the firing rail 112 and an outlet portion that is located above the game area PE. The game ball fired based on the operation of the solenoid 111 is guided to the game area PE by moving in the order of the firing rail 112 → guide rail 100 (entrance portion → exit portion). By adjusting the amount of operation of the game ball launch handle 41, the game ball can be divided into an area on the left side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE and an area on the right side of the variable display unit 67 in the game area PE. It is possible.

  In the game board 60a, on the front side of the exit portion, specifically, in the vicinity of the tip of the inner rail 101, a reversal prevention member 106 for preventing the reversal of the game ball reaching the game area PE into the guide passage 103 is attached. Thus, it is possible to prevent the subsequent launch of the game ball from being hindered by the game ball that has reached the game area PE first.

  The guide rail 100 (see FIG. 4) and the firing rail 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 face each other diagonally across the lower edge of the game board 60a. That is, both the rails 100 and 112 are arranged such that the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the tip portion of the firing rail 112 are shifted left and right in the vicinity of the lower end edge of the game board 60a. Thus, a gap of a predetermined interval is formed between the entrance portion of the guide rail 100 and the firing rail 112 while bringing both rails 100 and 112 close to the lower end edge of the game board 60a.

  A foul ball passage 46 is disposed below the gap formed in this way. The foul ball passage 46 is formed integrally with the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. If the game balls launched from the game ball launching mechanism 110 do not reach the game area PE and return to the inside of the guide passage 103 as foul balls, the foul balls enter the foul ball passage 46 through the gap. It becomes. The foul ball passage 46 communicates with the lower door passage on the front door side, and the game balls that have entered the foul ball passage 46 are discharged to the lower plate 34 shown in FIG. This suppresses interference between the foul ball and the next game ball to be launched.

  A through-hole penetrating the inner frame base 50 in the front-rear direction is formed on the left side of the firing rail 112 in the inner frame base 50 (specifically, the side supporting the front door frame 14). A forming member 121 is provided. The passage forming member 121 is screwed to the inner frame base 50 and has a main body side upper dish path and a main body side lower dish path. The upstream side of the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish passage communicates with a game ball distributing section described later. In addition, the receiving portion of the passage forming unit 45 attached to the front door frame 14 enters below the passage forming member 121, and the front door side upper plate passage is disposed below the main body side upper plate passage, A front door side upper dish passage is disposed below the main body side lower dish passage.

  An opening / closing member 124 that opens and closes the main body side upper dish path and the main body side lower dish path is attached to the inner frame base 50 below the passage forming member 121. The opening / closing member 124 is supported by a support shaft provided at the lower end thereof so as to be pivotable in the front-rear direction, and further includes an urging member that urges the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish path to a front position. Is provided. Therefore, when the front door frame 14 is opened with respect to the inner frame 13, the opening / closing member 124 rises as shown in the figure, and closes the main body side upper dish passage and the main body side lower dish path. Thereby, when the front door frame 14 is opened in a state where game balls are stored in the main body side upper dish passage or the main body side lower dish passage, it is possible to prevent such a problem that the stored balls spill out. On the other hand, in a state where the front door frame 14 is closed, the opening / closing member 124 is pushed open against the biasing force by the receiving portion provided in the passage forming unit 45 of the front door frame 14. In this state, the main body side upper dish path and the front door side upper dish path communicate with each other, and the main body side lower dish path and the front door side lower dish path communicate with each other.

  Next, the back configuration of the inner frame 13 (the inner frame base 50 and the game board unit 60) will be described with reference to FIG.

  Bearing fittings 132 are vertically arranged on the rotation base end side on the back surface of the inner frame base 50. The bearing bracket 132 is formed with bearing portions spaced apart from each other in the vertical direction, and the back pack unit 15 is rotatably attached to the inner frame 13 by these bearing portions. Further, a plurality of fixing levers for fixing the back pack unit 15 to the inner frame base 50 in a closed state are provided on the back surface of the inner frame base 50.

  As already described, a window hole 54 that penetrates in the thickness direction of the inner frame base 50 and opens to the back side of the inner frame base 50 is formed in the bottom portion of the game board housing portion 53 in the inner frame base 50. The window hole 54 is covered from the front side of the inner frame 13 by the game board unit 60 housed in the game board housing portion 53. Various components such as a control device are mounted on the back of the game board unit 60 (rear block 60 b), and these various components are exposed to the back side of the inner frame 13 through the window holes 54. Here, the configuration of the back surface of the game board unit 60 will be described.

  The back block 60b attached to the back of the game board 60a has a substantially box-shaped block base 136 opened to the game board 60a, and the block base 136 is fixed to the back of the game board 60a. Thus, the game board 60a and the back block 60b are integrated.

  The front side of the block base 136 is an arrangement area for a movable presentation mechanism (for example, a movable presentation unit 230 described later) and a decorative member that can emit light, and the rear side thereof is a control device that controls these various configurations. Or the arrangement area of the variable display unit 67 (symbol display device 75).

  More specifically, a part of the block base 136 protrudes toward the back side of the inner frame base 50, and the symbol display device 75 described above and the symbol display device 75 are driven with respect to the protruding portion. A display control device 170 is attached. The symbol display device 75 and the display control device 170 are arranged so that the symbol display device is on the front side and the display control device 170 is on the rear side in the front-rear direction (thickness direction of the inner frame base 50). Further, a notification / effect control device 143 is mounted on the back surface of the block base 136 so as to be positioned behind the display control device 170.

  The notification / production control device 143 includes a notification / production control board that controls sound output, lamp display, and control of the display control device 170 in accordance with an instruction from the main control device described later. It is accommodated in a substrate box 145 made of a transparent resin material or the like.

  A main controller unit 160 is provided below the notification / production control device 143 so as to cover the block base 136 from behind. The main controller unit 160 has a synthetic resin mounting base 161 fixed to the back of the game board unit 60 (specifically, the back block 60b), and a main control unit 162 mounted on the mounting base 161. Yes. The main controller 162 includes a main control board having a function (main control circuit) that controls the main control of the game and a function (power failure monitoring circuit) that monitors the power source, and the main control board is made of a transparent resin material. It is configured to be accommodated in a substrate box 163 made of, for example.

  The board box 163 includes a substantially rectangular parallelepiped box base (front case body) and a box cover (back case body) that covers an opening of the box base. The box base and the box cover are connected so as not to be unsealed by a sealing portion as sealing means, whereby the substrate box 163 is sealed. A plurality of sealing portions are provided on the long side portion of the substrate box 163, and at least one of them is used for sealing processing.

  Any structure can be applied to the sealing part as long as the box base and the box cover are connected to each other so that they cannot be opened.However, the box base and the box cover can be connected by inserting a locking claw into the long hole constituting the sealing part. It is designed to be combined so that it cannot be opened. The sealing process by the sealing part prevents unauthorized opening after the sealing, and makes it possible to detect such a situation quickly and easily even if unauthorized opening is performed. It is possible to perform the sealing process again later. That is, the sealing process is performed by inserting a locking claw into at least one of the plurality of sealing portions. When opening the board box 163 such as when a failure occurs in the housed main control board or when inspecting the main control board, the connecting part between the sealing part into which the locking claw is inserted and another sealing part is provided. Disconnect. As a result, the box base and the box cover of the substrate box 163 are separated, and the internal main control substrate can be taken out. Thereafter, when the sealing process is performed again, the locking claws are inserted into the long holes of the other sealing portions. If the history of opening the substrate box 163 is left in the substrate box 163, it can be easily found that the unauthorized opening has been performed by looking at the substrate box 163.

  A plurality of coupling pieces are provided on one short side portion of the substrate box 163 so as to protrude laterally. These coupling pieces have a one-to-one correspondence with a plurality of coupled pieces formed on the mounting base 161, and a sealing process is performed between the board box 163 and the mounting base 161 by the coupling pieces and the coupled pieces. Is called.

  The portion of the front surface of the block base 136 that faces the lower back of the game board 60a corresponds to the game board opening of the general winning port 61, variable winning device 64, and operating ports 62, 63 and on the downstream side. A collection passage (not shown) that collects in one place is formed. Thereby, all the game balls won in the general winning opening 61 and the like are gathered below the game board unit 60 through the collection passage. That is, the block base 136 is provided with a function of collecting game balls won in various winning openings.

  A discharge passage, which will be described later, is arranged below the game board unit 60, and the game balls gathered below the game board unit 60 by the collection passage are led out into the discharge passage. Similarly, the out port 68 leads to the discharge passage, and the game ball that has not won any winning port is led out into the discharge passage through the out port 68.

  In addition, the block base 136 constituting the back block 60b includes a general winning opening detection sensor for detecting a game ball won in the general winning opening 61 as a detection sensor for each of the above-described winning portions, and a variable winning device. A variable winning device detection sensor for detecting a game ball won in 64 and an operating port detection sensor for detecting a game ball entering the operating ports 62 and 63 are mounted, and a winning detection mechanism is provided by these various detection sensors. Is configured. These various detection sensors are electrically connected to the main controller 162, and detection information (detection signals) is output from the respective detection sensors to the main controller 162.

<Back pack unit 15>
Next, the back pack unit 15 will be described with reference to FIGS.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the inner frame 13 is covered from behind by the back pack unit 15. The back pack unit 15 includes a back pack 201, and a payout mechanism unit 202, a discharge passage board, and a control device assembly unit 204 are attached to the back pack 201.

  The back pack 201 is formed of a synthetic resin having transparency, and as shown in FIG. 3, a base portion 211 to which the payout mechanism portion 202 and the like are attached, and a protective cover portion 212 that protrudes rearward from the pachinko machine 10 and has a substantially rectangular parallelepiped shape. And have. The protective cover 212 has a shape in which the left and right side surfaces and the upper surface are closed and only the lower surface is opened, and has a size sufficient to surround at least the variable display unit 67.

  The base portion 211 is provided with an external terminal plate 213 at the upper right portion thereof. The external terminal board 213 is provided with various output terminals, and various signals are output to the management control device on the game hall side through these output terminals. The base portion 211 is provided with a pair of upper and lower retaining pins at the right end when viewed from the rear of the pachinko machine 10, and the retaining pins are inserted into bearing fittings 132 (specifically, bearing portions) provided on the inner frame 13. By doing so, the back pack unit 15 is supported rotatably with respect to the inner frame 13. In addition, a fastening tool for fastening with respect to a fastening hole provided in the inner frame 13 is provided at the rotating front end portion of the base portion 211, and the fastening tool is fitted into the fastening hole. A back pack unit 15 is fixed to the inner frame 13.

  In the base portion 211, a payout mechanism portion 202 is disposed so as to bypass the protective cover portion 212. The payout mechanism 202 is provided with a tank 221 that is arranged at the top of the back pack 201 and that opens upward, and game balls supplied from the island facilities of the game hall are sequentially replenished to the tank 221. The A tank rail that is gently inclined toward the downstream side is connected to the lower side of the tank 221, and a case rail extending in the vertical direction is connected to the downstream side of the tank rail. A payout device 222 is provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail. The game balls paid out from the payout device 222 are supplied to the game ball distribution unit provided in the base portion 211 of the back pack 201 through the payout passage provided on the downstream side of the payout device 222.

  The game ball distribution unit has a function of distributing the game balls paid out from the payout device 222 to any one of the upper plate 33, the lower plate 34, and a discharge passage described later, and the inner opening is the main body side described above. The upper dish passage and the front door side upper dish path communicate with the upper dish 33, and the outer opening is formed so as to communicate with the main body side lower dish path and front door side lower dish path. .

  As shown in FIG. 3, the discharge passage board and the control device collective unit 204 are attached to the lower end portion of the base portion 211 so as to sandwich the lower end portion in the front-rear direction. In the discharge passage board 203, a discharge passage opened rearward is formed on a surface facing the control device assembly unit 204, and an open portion of the discharge passage is closed by the control device assembly unit 204. The discharge passage is formed so as to discharge the game ball to the island facility or the like of the game hall, and the game ball led to the discharge passage from the recovery passage described above passes through the discharge passage to the outside of the pachinko machine 10. Discharged.

  The control device assembly unit 204 has a horizontally long mounting base on which a payout control device 181 and a power supply / launch control device 191 are mounted. The payout control device 181 and the power supply / launch control device 191 are arranged so as to overlap each other so that the payout control device 181 is behind the pachinko machine 10.

  In the payout control device 181, a payout control board for controlling the payout device 222 is accommodated in the board box, and a state return switch provided on the payout control board projects out of the board box. For example, when the state return switch is pressed when a payout error occurs, such as a ball jam in the payout device 222, the ball jam is eliminated.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 includes a power supply / launch control board housed in a board box, and a predetermined power source required for various control devices is generated and output by the board, and a game ball is fired by a player. Control of the launch of the game ball accompanying the operation of the handle 41 is performed. Further, the power supply / launch control device 191 is provided with a RAM erase switch. This pachinko machine 10 has a function to store and store various data so that even if a power failure occurs, it maintains the state at the time of the power failure, and when it recovers from the power failure, it can be restored to the state at the time of the power failure. It has become. Therefore, for example, when the power is turned off in the normal procedure, as in the case of the game hall being closed, the state before the turn-off is stored and retained. However, if the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch, the RAM data is initialized. It has become.

  As already described, in the present embodiment, the rear block 60b in which various movable effect devices (hereinafter referred to as movable effect devices) and decorative members that emit light are mounted behind the transparent game board 60a. The rendering device and the like are visible through the game board 60a.

  In particular, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIGS. 5 and 6 (a perspective view of the game board unit 60), a part of the back block 60b is located behind the game area PE. Thereby, it is possible to utilize the back of the game area PE where the game balls flow down as an execution area for various game effects. According to such a configuration, it is possible to contribute to improving the appearance of the game board unit 60 and widening the production execution area as compared with a game machine equipped with a conventionally known wooden game board.

  Further, by providing the back block 60b behind the game board 60a, the space between the variable display unit 67 and the game board 60a can be set as the installation area of the movable effect device. Compared to the above configuration, it is easy to increase the size of the movable production device and diversify the operation. In this Embodiment, it has the characteristic structure regarding this movable production | presentation apparatus.

  The game board 60a is mainly provided with a function of forming an area (game area PE) where game balls flow down. Here, when it is going to balance improvement of various decoration functions and presentation functions concerning a game, and securing of game area PE, game area PE is inevitably compressed by giving priority to the former. In this regard, as shown in FIG. 5 and FIG. 6, the minimum necessary configuration for securing the flow path of the game ball and securing the inflow port, etc. is arranged on the front surface of the game board 60a to add to the production and decoration. The game area PE is prevented from being compressed by moving the general configuration to the back block 60b side. That is, it is possible to secure the game area PE as wide as possible within the limited range of the front surface of the game board 60a (specifically, the plate).

  As described above, the back block 60b has the block base 136 as a base on which various effect devices such as the variable display unit 67 and various control devices such as the notification / effect control device 143 are mounted.

  The block base 136 is formed by integrally forming a flat facing portion 137 facing the back of the game board 60a and a base bulging portion 138 bulging backward from the facing portion 137 with a transparent synthetic resin material. The outer shape when viewed is substantially the same size as the game board 60a (specifically, the vertical width is slightly smaller).

  The base bulging portion 138 has a box shape opened forward (to the side of the game board 60a), and the facing portion 137 is constituted by a mounting flange formed along the opening edge. The game board 60a and the back block 60b are unitized by being screwed to the game board 60a in a state where the facing portion 137 is in contact with the back face of the game board 60a (see FIG. 3).

  An open portion is formed at the bottom of the base bulging portion 138 so as to penetrate in the front-rear direction, that is, communicate with the central opening 72 of the game board 60a. The variable display unit 67 is attached to the back surface portion of the base bulging portion 138 so as to close the opening portion, and the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is exposed to the front side of the gaming machine through the opening portion. . In addition, the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 170 are stacked on the variable display unit 67 (specifically, the symbol display device 75) so that the latter is the front side and the former is the rear side, and further below that. In view of the fact that the main control device 162 is attached to the base bulging portion 138, the back surface portion of the bulging portion functions as an attachment portion for attaching various electrical configurations that do not affect the appearance. .

<Movable production unit 230>
The back block 60b has a movable effect unit 230 that operates to enhance the effect. The movable effect unit 230 is disposed between the block base 136 and the game board 60a, and extends along the peripheral edge of the central opening 72 and the display screen 75a on the back side of the game board 60a. In this case, the movable effect unit 230 is blocked by the gaming board 60a from the front of the gaming machine and is difficult to see, and does not block the line of sight to the display screen 75a from the front of the gaming machine.

  The movable effect unit 230 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 7 is a front view of the movable effect unit 230, and FIG. 8 is an exploded perspective view of the movable effect unit 230.

  As shown in FIGS. 7 and 8, the movable effect unit 230 includes a unit body 231 having a substantially rectangular frame shape, and a first decoration device 232 and a second decoration device 233 attached to the unit body 231. . The unit main body 231 has a pair of vertical frame portions 231a extending in the vertical direction and a pair of horizontal frame portions 231b connecting the vertical frame portions 231a. Of the pair of vertical frame portions 231a, The first decoration device 232 is attached to one side, and the second decoration device 233 is attached to the other side. For example, the first decoration device 232 is attached to the right vertical frame portion 231a as viewed from the front of the gaming machine, and the second decoration device 233 is attached to the left vertical frame portion 231a. The first decoration device 232 corresponds to the link device, and the second decoration device 233 corresponds to the effect device.

  The unit main body 231 has a frame opening 231c surrounded by each vertical frame portion 231a and each horizontal frame portion 231b, and the first decoration device 232 and the second decoration device 233 are arranged with the frame opening 231c interposed therebetween. ing. In this case, the first decoration device 232 and the second decoration device 233 are separated from each other in a side-by-side state. Further, the unit main body 231 is fixed to the block base 136 in a state of being hidden on the back side of the game board 60a.

<First decoration device 232>
The first decoration device 232 will be described with reference to FIGS. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the first decoration device 232, FIG. 10 is a schematic front view of the first decoration device 232, and FIG. 11 is a schematic diagram for explaining the operation of the link portions 242 and 243. In FIG. 10, (a) shows the case where the first decoration device 232 is in the retracted state, and (b) shows the case where the first decoration device 232 is in the effect state. Further, in FIG. 10A, the illustration of the movement effect unit 243b is omitted, and in FIG. 10B, the movement effect unit 243b is illustrated by a virtual line.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the first decoration device 232 includes a main body part 241 attached to the unit main body 231, and a first link part 242 and a second link provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the main body part 241. Part 243. In the first decoration device 232, a link mechanism is constructed in which the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243 rotate in conjunction with each other with respect to the main body portion 241 as a fixed link. Reference numeral 232 corresponds to a link device having a link mechanism. In the first decoration device 232, a first link part 242 is arranged on the front side of the main body part 241, and a second link part 243 is arranged on the front side of the first link part 242.

  The main body portion 241 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape, and extends along the vertical frame portion 231a of the unit main body 231 with its long side extending vertically. The main body portion 241 is attached to the front surface of the vertical frame portion 231a so that the thickness direction thereof is the front-rear direction of the gaming machine. In this case, the main body 241 does not overlap with the central opening 72 of the game board 60a in the front-rear direction, but is disposed at a position covered by the game board 60a from the front of the game machine.

  The first link part 242 and the second link part 243 extend along the front surface of the main body part 241. The first link part 242 is connected to the main body part 241 via the first shaft part 244. The first link part 242 is formed in a long plate shape, and is arranged in a direction in which the thickness direction is the thickness direction of the main body part 241.

  The first shaft portion 244 is a fixed shaft portion fixed to each of the main body portion 241 and the first link portion 242. In the present embodiment, the first shaft portion 244 is a convex portion protruding from the first link portion 242 toward the main body portion 241, and enters the concave portion 244 a formed in the main body portion 241 to the main body portion 241. It is fixed. In this case, the first shaft portion 244 connects the upper end portion of the main body portion 241 and one end portion of the first link portion 242.

  The second link portion 243 is connected to the main body portion 241 via the second shaft portion 245 and is connected to the first link portion 242 via the third shaft portion 246. The second shaft portion 245 is fixed to the second link portion 243, while being slidable relative to the main body portion 241.

  The second link part 243 includes a link part body 243a provided with the second shaft part 245 and the third shaft part 246, and a movement effect part 243b provided on the front side of the link part body 243a. The link portion main body 243a is formed in a plate shape, and extends from the second shaft portion 245 beyond the third shaft portion 246 along the front surface of the main body portion 241, and the second shaft portion 245 and the third shaft portion 246 are connected to each other. The shaft can be rotated with respect to the main body portion 241 and the first link portion 242. The movement effect unit 243b has a shape and color imitating a dog's face, and is attached to the link unit body 243a so as to cover the link unit body 243a from the front of the gaming machine. Along with (the operation of the link mechanism), it moves to the retracted position PA1 (see FIG. 6) and the effect position PA2 (see FIG. 4). The retreat position PA1 and the effect position PA2 are aligned along the direction intersecting with the moving direction of the second shaft portion 245.

  The first decoration device 232 can enhance the effect by moving the movement effect unit 243b from the retraction position PA1 to the effect position PA2, and the first decoration device 232 can also be referred to as an effect device. In addition, the first decoration device 232 shifts to the retracted state when the movement effect unit 243b moves to the retreat position PA1, and shifts to the effect state when the movement effect unit 243b moves to the effect position PA2. become.

  The second shaft portion 245 is fixed to the link portion main body 243 a of the second link portion 243, while being movable along the plate surface of the main body portion 241. In the second link portion 243, the second shaft portion 245 is fixed to the end portion of the link portion main body 243a. When the first decoration device 232 is in the retracted state, the link portion main body 243a extends upward with the second shaft portion 245 side as a lower end. In addition, the 2nd axial part 245 is attached to the front-end | tip of the part protruded toward the main-body part 241 in the link part main body 243a.

  The third shaft portion 246 is fixed to each of the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243, and is a moving shaft portion that moves as the link portions 242 and 243 rotate. In the present embodiment, the third shaft portion 246 is a convex portion that protrudes from the link portion main body 243 a of the second link portion 243 toward the first link portion 242, and the concave portion 246 a formed in the first link portion 242 It is fixed to the first link part 242 in a state of entering. The third shaft portion 246 is disposed at the end of the first link portion 242 opposite to the first shaft portion 244, and is disposed at an intermediate position of the second link portion 243.

  The axes of the first shaft portion 244, the second shaft portion 245, and the third shaft portion 246 are in the thickness direction of the first decoration device 232 (the overlapping direction of the main body portion 241, the first link portion 242, and the second link portion 243). It extends along. In this case, the first link part 242 and the second link part 243 rotate along the plate surface of the main body part 241 around the shaft parts 244 to 246.

  In the first decoration device 232, the movement effect unit 243 b is movable in the gaming machine width direction (left-right direction) by the second shaft portion 245 slidingly moving up and down along the main body portion 241. The second shaft portion 245 can move within a predetermined range at a position lower than the first shaft portion 244, and the movement effect portion 243b has a second axis as shown in FIG. 10 (a). When the portion 245 is at the lowest position LA1 within the movement range, it is at the retracted position PA1, and as shown in FIG. 10B, the second shaft portion 245 moves to the highest position HA1 within the movement range. Will move to the production position PA2.

  The movement effect unit 243b is hidden behind the gaming board 60a when in the retracted position PA1, and the side surface on the second decoration device 233 side is visible from the front of the gaming machine. (See FIG. 6). In this case, the second link part 243 other than the movement effect part 243b (for example, the link part main body 243a) and the first link part 242 are also hidden on the back side of the game board 60a. Other than the side surface of 243b, it cannot be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine.

  The effect position PA2 is a position closer to the second decoration device 233 than the retreat position PA1, and is an intermediate position between the pair of vertical frame portions 231a of the unit main body 231. When the movement effect unit 243b is at the effect position PA2, the movement effect unit 243b is exposed to the front of the display screen 75a and can be almost visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 72 (see FIG. 4). On the other hand, the link part main body 243a and the first link part 242 are hidden behind the movement effect part 243b, and other than the movement effect part 243b cannot be seen from the front of the gaming machine.

  In the first decoration device 232, the movement range of the movement effect unit 243b is set by structurally limiting the movement range of the second shaft portion 245, whereby the movement effect unit 243b is moved from the retreat position PA1. It is possible to move between the production positions PA2.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the main body portion 241 has a main body guide portion 251 that guides the sliding direction of the second shaft portion 245. The second shaft portion 245 can move along the main body guide portion 251 while retaining the direction of the axis while being locked to the main body guide portion 251. The main body guide portion 251 linearly extends in the vertical direction along the front surface of the main body portion 241 between a position spaced downward from the first shaft portion 244 and a position spaced upward from the lower end of the main body portion 241. ing.

  The first shaft portion 244 is disposed on an extension line of the main body guide portion 251. In this case, the second shaft portion 245 moves in a direction (game machine width direction) intersecting the sliding direction of the second shaft portion 245 as the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243 rotate. It will be.

<The movement of the link parts 242, 243>
As shown in FIG. 10A, when the movement effect portion 243b is at the retracted position PA1, the third shaft portion 246 overlaps the front and rear of the main body guide portion 251 (on the movement locus of the second shaft portion 245). Is arranged. In this case, as shown to Fig.11 (a), the 2nd axial part 245 exists in the bottom dead center in the link mechanism of the 1st decoration apparatus 232, or a position close | similar to it, and makes this position the lowest position LA1. When the main body guide portion 251 is at the lowest position LA1, the main body guide portion 251 extends below the position where the second shaft portion 245 is present. In the present embodiment, when the second shaft portion 245 reaches the lower end portion of the main body guide portion 251, the second shaft portion 245 has moved to the lowest position LA1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 11 (b), when the movement effect part 243b moves to the effect position PA2, the third shaft part 246 is centered as the first link part 242 and the second link part 243 rotate. While moving toward the opening 72 side (second decoration device 233 side), the second shaft portion 245 moves upward (first shaft portion 244).

  As shown in FIG. 10B, when the movement effect unit 243b moves to the effect position PA2, the second shaft portion 245 and the third shaft portion 246 are arranged side by side at a position lower than the first shaft portion 244. Has been. In this case, as shown in FIG. 11C, the second shaft portion 245 is disposed at substantially the same height position as the third shaft portion 246 or a slightly higher position than this position, and this position is the uppermost position HA1. It is called. Further, in this case, the third shaft portion 246 is located at a position farthest from the main body guide portion 251 (movement locus of the second shaft portion 245) in the link mechanism of the first decoration device 232.

  When the movement effect part 243b is in the effect position PA2, the second shaft part 245 is restricted from moving above the uppermost position HA1. The main body guide portion 251 has a rising stopper 252 that restricts the second shaft portion 245 from rising from the uppermost position HA1, and when the movement effect portion 243b is at the effect position PA2, the second shaft portion 245 is In this state, the lift stopper 252 is caught from below.

  When the second shaft portion 245 is at the uppermost position HA1, the second link portion 243 has the second straight line N1 that connects the first shaft portion 244 and the third shaft portion 246 in the first link portion 242. A second straight line N2 connecting the shaft portion 245 and the third shaft portion 246 intersects. At the intersection of the first straight line N1 and the second straight line N2, the link angle α1 between the first shaft portion 244 and the second shaft portion 245 is smaller than 90 degrees. Note that the second straight line N2 is not orthogonal to the tangent line of the curve drawn by the third shaft portion 246 as the movement trajectory as the first link portion 242 rotates. The link angle α1 corresponds to the intersection angle between the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243.

  Here, when an external force is applied to the first link unit 242 in the direction in which the movement effect unit 243b moves to the retreat position PA1 (the direction in which the angle between the main body unit 241 and the first link unit 242 decreases), The external force is also applied to the second shaft portion 245 so as to be raised. However, since the rise of the second shaft portion 245 is restricted by the raising stopper 252, the second shaft portion 245 is positioned at the uppermost position HA1. Retained. In this case, since the link angle α1 is smaller than 90 degrees, an external force is applied in the direction in which the second shaft portion 245 moves downward (the direction away from the first shaft portion 244) with respect to the second link portion 243. Unless this is done, the link parts 242 and 243 do not rotate, and the movement effect part 243b is also held at the effect position PA2.

  When the movement effect unit 243b is at the effect position PA2, the second link unit 243 is in a contraction restricting state that restricts the intermediate arm 261 from contracting because the link angle α1 is 90 degrees or less. Yes. Further, since the link angle α1 is larger than 90 degrees, the contraction permission state is permitted in which the intermediate arm 261 is allowed to contract.

  The movement effect part 243b appears from the back side of the game board 60a to the front of the display screen 75a by moving from the retreat position PA1 to the effect position PA2, but the second shaft part 245 exceeds the uppermost position HA1. When the second shaft portion 245 approaches the first shaft portion 244, the movement effect portion 243b again moves in a direction hidden behind the game board 60a. Therefore, the ascending stopper 252 has a function of holding the movement effect unit 243b in a state where the portion exposed in front of the display screen 75a is the largest.

<Intermediate arm 261>
Returning to the description of FIG. 9, the first decoration device 232 includes an intermediate arm 261 that connects an intermediate portion of the first link portion 242 to the main body portion 241. The intermediate arm 261 can be expanded and contracted, and the first link part 242 can be rotated with respect to the main body part 241 by expanding and contracting. The intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state when the movement effect unit 243b is at the retracted position PA1, and the first link in the direction (effect direction) in which the movement effect unit 243b moves to the effect position PA2 by extending from the contracted state. When the part 242 is rotated and the movement effect part 243b reaches the effect position PA2, it is in an extended state. Further, by contracting from the extended state, the first link unit 242 is rotated in a direction (retraction direction) in which the movement effect unit 243b moves to the retreat position PA1.

  The intermediate arm 261 is disposed side by side with the first link portion 242 on the front side of the main body portion 241. In this case, the first link portion 242 and the intermediate arm 261 are arranged side by side in the gaming machine width direction. The intermediate arm 261 is connected to the main body portion 241 via the main body side shaft portion 262 and connected to the first link portion 242 via the link side shaft portion 263. The main body side shaft portion 262 is fixed to each of the intermediate arm 261 and the main body portion 241, and the link side shaft portion 263 is fixed to each of the intermediate arm 261 and the first link portion 242.

  The intermediate arm 261 is disposed on the front side of the main body 241. In the present embodiment, the main body side shaft portion 262 is a convex portion that protrudes from the intermediate arm 261 toward the main body portion 241, and is fixed to the main body portion 241 while entering the concave portion 262 a formed in the main body portion 241. ing. The intermediate arm 261 is arranged side by side along the front surface of the main body 241 with respect to the first link portion 242. A concave portion is formed on a side surface of the first link portion 242, and an end portion of the intermediate arm 261 enters the concave portion. The link side shaft portion 263 is fixed to the first link portion 242 in a state of passing through the intermediate arm 261 in the recess of the first link portion 242.

  The link-side shaft portion 263 is disposed at an intermediate position between the first shaft portion 244 and the third shaft portion 246 in the first link portion 242. The link side shaft portion 263 is disposed closer to the third shaft portion 246 than the middle position between the first shaft portion 244 and the third shaft portion 246, and the link side shaft portion 263 and the third shaft portion 246 are connected to each other. The separation distance is larger than the separation distance between the link side shaft portion 263 and the first shaft portion 244.

  As shown in FIGS. 10 and 11, the main body side shaft portion 262 has an effect position PA2 in the width direction of the main body 241 rather than the position of the first link portion 242 when the movement effect portion 243b is in the retracted position PA1. It is arrange | positioned on the opposite side (opposite side with the 2nd decoration device 233). For this reason, even if the intermediate arm 261 is arranged side by side with the first link portion 242, the first link portion 242 can be rotated without contacting the main body side shaft portion 262. That is, it can be avoided that the intermediate arm 261 obstructs the rotation of the first link portion 242. In addition, the main body side shaft portion 262 is disposed on the opposite side to the effect position PA2 across the movement locus (main body guide portion 251) of the second shaft portion 245.

  The main body side shaft portion 262 is disposed at a position lower than the first shaft portion 244 and higher than the movement range (main body guide portion 251) of the second shaft portion 245 in the vertical direction of the main body portion 241. Thus, when the first link portion 242 rotates with the expansion and contraction of the intermediate arm 261, the intermediate arm 261 does not enter the movement range of the second shaft portion 245. For this reason, even if the main body side shaft portion 262 is arranged on the opposite side of the effect position PA2 across the main body guide portion 251, the second shaft portion 245 is slid and moved without contacting the intermediate arm 261. Can be made. That is, the intermediate arm 261 can be prevented from hindering the rotation of the second link portion 243.

  As shown in FIG. 9, the intermediate arm 261 is connected to the first arm portion 264 connected to the main body portion 241 via the main body side shaft portion 262 and to the first link portion 242 via the link side shaft portion 263. A second arm portion 265 and an intermediate shaft portion 266 connecting the arm portions 264 and 265. The first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 can be relatively rotated with the intermediate shaft portion 266 as an axis, and the intermediate arm 261 includes the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion. 265 extends by rotating relatively in the direction in which the crossing angle increases, and shrinks by rotating relatively in a direction in which the crossing angle decreases.

  The axis of the intermediate shaft portion 266 extends along the thickness direction of the first decoration device 232, and the intermediate shaft portion 266 moves along the plate surface of the main body portion 241 as the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts. The first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 are provided side by side along the axial direction of the intermediate shaft portion 266. The second arm part 265 is disposed on the first link part 242 side of the first arm part 264, and the first arm part 264 is in a state of entering between the second arm part 265 and the main body part 241. . In this case, the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 are arranged side by side along the plate surface of the main body portion 241 with respect to the first link portion 242.

  In the present embodiment, the intermediate shaft portion 266 is a convex portion protruding from the first arm portion 264 toward the second arm portion 265, and the arm length into which the intermediate shaft portion 266 is inserted is inserted into the second arm portion 265. A hole 265a is formed. On the opposite side of the first arm portion 264 with respect to the second arm portion 265, a sandwiching member 267 that sandwiches the second arm portion 265 in a rotatable state with the first arm portion 264 is provided. The sandwiching member 267 is fixed to the tip of the intermediate shaft portion 266 with a screw or the like. The arm long hole 265a extends along the longitudinal direction of the second arm portion 265 (alignment direction of the intermediate shaft portion 266 and the link side shaft portion 263), and the intermediate shaft portion 266 slides along the longitudinal direction. Is possible. In this case, the intermediate shaft portion 266 slides while maintaining the direction of the axis.

<Movement of intermediate arm 261>
As shown in FIGS. 10A and 11A, the intermediate arm 261 is in a folded state when it is in a contracted state (when the movement effect unit 243b is at the retracted position PA1). The first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 are folded and extend in parallel. In this case, the intersection angle between the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 is approximately 0 degrees. In this case, both the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 extend along the gaming machine width direction. Here, the separation distance between the main body side shaft portion 262 and the intermediate shaft portion 266 in the first arm portion 264 is smaller than the separation distance between the link side shaft portion 263 and the intermediate shaft portion 266 in the second arm portion 265. When the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state, the main body side shaft portion 262 is in a state of entering between the link side shaft portion 263 and the intermediate shaft portion 266.

  When the intermediate arm 261 extends from the contracted state, as the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 rotate, the crossing angle between the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 increases. Go. In this case, the intermediate shaft portion 266 moves from the side opposite to the link side shaft portion 263 across the main body side shaft portion 262 toward the space between the main body side shaft portion 262 and the link side shaft portion 263. become.

  As shown in FIG. 11 (b), when the intermediate arm 261 shifts from the contracted state to the extended state, the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 have their respective rotation tip sides (intermediate shaft portions 266). It rotates in a direction passing under the main body side shaft portion 262. That is, it rotates forward. In this case, the intermediate shaft portion 266 passes between the main body side shaft portion 262 and the main body guide portion 251 on the opposite side of the first shaft portion 244 across the main body side shaft portion 262.

  As shown in FIGS. 10B and 11C, the intermediate arm 261 is unfolded when the extended arm 261 is in the extended state (when the moving effect portion 243b is in the effect position PA2), and the first arm portion 264 is removed. And the second arm portion 265 are linearly extended. In this case, the angle between the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion is approximately 180 degrees. Even when the intermediate arm 261 contracts from the extended state, the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 rotate in a direction in which the intermediate shaft portion 266 passes below the main body side shaft portion 262.

  When the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts, the position of the main body side shaft portion 262 does not change, while the link side shaft portion 263 moves along the width direction of the main body portion 241. When the intermediate arm 261 extends, the link side shaft portion 263 moves in a direction away from the main body side shaft portion 262, and accordingly, the intermediate arm 261 pushes the first link portion 242 to the side. On the other hand, when the intermediate arm 261 contracts, the link side shaft portion 263 moves in a direction approaching the main body side shaft portion 262, and accordingly, the intermediate arm 261 pulls the first link portion 242 toward the main body portion 241 side. It becomes a state.

  The intermediate arm 261 extends and contracts in a region that does not overlap the main body guide portion 251 in the thickness direction of the first decoration device 232. In other words, the movement trajectories of the link side shaft portion 263 and the intermediate shaft portion 266 that move relative to the main body side shaft portion 262 do not intersect with the movement trajectories associated with the sliding movement of the second shaft portion 245. For this reason, it is avoided that the expansion / contraction of the intermediate arm 261 interferes with the sliding movement of the second shaft portion 245.

  The first decoration device 232 has a reverse rotation stopper 269 that restricts the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 from rotating in the reverse direction when the intermediate arm 261 shifts from the contracted state to the extended state. 9). The reverse rotation stopper 269 is a convex portion protruding from the main body portion 241 toward the front of the gaming machine, and is disposed on the opposite side of the first link portion 242 with the main body side shaft portion 262 interposed therebetween. When the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state, at least one of the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 contacts the reverse rotation stopper 269 from below, so that the intermediate shaft portion 266 moves toward the first shaft portion 244 side. It is restricted that the arm portions 264 and 265 rotate in the moving direction.

  As shown in FIG. 11A, when the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state, the main body side shaft portion 262, the link side shaft portion 263, and the intermediate shaft portion 266 are aligned on a straight line. An arm straight line N3 connecting the shaft portion 263 and the intermediate shaft portion 266 intersects the first straight line N1 of the first link portion 242. At the intersection of the arm straight line N3 and the first straight line N1, the arm angle α2 between the intermediate shaft portion 266 and the third shaft portion 246 is approximately 90 degrees.

  In this case, the intermediate arm 261 is substantially orthogonal to the first link part 242, and the arm straight line N3 is a tangent to the curve drawn by the link-side shaft part 263 as a movement trajectory as the first link part 242 rotates. Almost matches. For this reason, even if an external force is applied to the first link unit 242 and the second link unit 243 in the direction in which the movement effect unit 243b moves to the effect position PA2, the arm units 264 and 265 have a direction in which the arm angle α2 decreases ( It is difficult to rotate in the direction of forward rotation). That is, the intermediate arm 261 is difficult to extend.

  In addition, it is assumed that an external force is applied to the link parts 242 and 243 in the direction in which the arm angle α2 increases (the direction of reverse rotation). In this case, since the reverse rotation of the arm portions 264 and 265 is blocked by the reverse rotation stopper 269, it is also restricted that the arm portions 264 and 265 rotate reversely and the intermediate arm 261 extends. Therefore, both the forward rotation and the reverse rotation of the arm portions 264 and 265 are restricted, and as a result, the intermediate arm 261 is prevented from extending and the movement effect portion 243b is unintentionally moved to the effect position PA2. it can.

  As shown in FIG. 10B, the second link portion 243 has a protruding portion 271 that protrudes from the third shaft portion 246 toward the side opposite to the first shaft portion 244. The protruding portion 271 includes each of the link portion main body 243a and the movement effect portion 243b, and the movement effect portion 243b extends from the second shaft portion 245 beyond the third shaft portion 246. For this reason, when the movement effect part 243b moves to the effect position PA2, for example, the protrusion dimension of the movement effect part 243b from the main body part 241 is larger than the configuration in which the second link part 243 does not have the protrusion part 271. growing. Thereby, presence of the movement production | presentation part 243b which moved to production position PA2 can be raised.

  When the movement effect part 243b is in the retracted position PA1, the first link part 242 and the intermediate arm 261 are in the gap between the protruding part 271 and the main body part 241. Here, the intermediate arm 261 is connected to the first link portion 242 via the link-side shaft portion 263 in a state of being arranged side by side along the front surface of the main body portion 241 with respect to the first link portion 242. Therefore, there is no need to increase the separation distance between the second link portion 243 and the main body portion 241 because the intermediate arm 261 is connected to the first link portion 242. That is, the thickness dimension of the first decoration device 232 can be made as small as possible.

<Drive units 281 and 282>
As shown in FIG. 9, the first decoration device 232 includes a first drive unit 281 that drives to rotate the first link unit 242 and a second drive that drives to rotate the second link unit 243. Part 282. The drive units 281 and 282 are motors such as stepping motors having a rotation shaft portion, and the link portions 242 and 243 can be rotated by rotating the rotation shaft portion. The drive units 281 and 282 are both attached to the main body 241 so as to protrude toward the back side of the main body 241, and are arranged side by side along the main body 241. In this case, the first drive unit 281 is disposed above the second drive unit 282. Note that the first drive unit 281 may be referred to as a first motor, and the second drive unit 282 may be referred to as a second motor. The first drive unit 281 corresponds to an expansion / contraction drive unit.

  The first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 have different driving performance. Regarding the rated value of the driving torque, the first driving unit 281 is larger than the second driving unit 282, and the rated value of the driving speed (the rotational speed of the rotating shaft unit) is the second driving unit 282. It is made larger than one drive unit 281. In this case, the first drive unit 281 corresponds to the torque drive unit, and the second drive unit 282 corresponds to the speed drive unit. Here, in the 1st decoration apparatus 232, since the 1st link part 242 and the 2nd link part 243 rotate in response, the load for rotating these link parts 242 and 243 is set to the 1st drive part. 281 and the second drive unit 282 are shared.

  For example, when the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 start driving at the same time, the rated torque of the first drive unit 281 is larger, so the link units 242 and 243 of the first drive unit 281 are driven by the driving force. The acceleration is larger than the acceleration of the link parts 242 and 243 by the driving force of the second driving part 282. In this case, the link parts 242 and 243 start to rotate by the driving force of the second driving part 282, for example, compared to the case where the link parts 242 and 243 start to rotate only by the driving force of the second driving part 282. Thus, the acceleration at the start of rotation of the link portions 242 and 243 increases.

  Further, since the rated speed of the second drive unit 282 is larger, the drive speed of the second drive unit 282, which is slow in acceleration, is increased after the predetermined time has elapsed after the drive units 281 and 282 start driving. 281 driving speed is overtaken. In this case, the link parts 242 and 243 are rotated by the driving force of the first driving part 281, for example, compared to the case where the link parts 242 and 243 are rotated only by the driving force of the first driving part 281. Thus, the maximum speed of the link portions 242 and 243 is increased.

  The drive units 281 and 282 can rotate in both forward and reverse directions. By rotating the respective rotation shafts by a predetermined effect angle, the movement effect unit 243b can move between the retreat position PA1 and the effect position PA2. The link portions 242 and 243 are rotated by an angle necessary for moving the frame. In this case, the effect angle (for example, 270 degrees) of the second drive unit 282 is set to be larger than the effect angle (for example, 120 degrees) of the first drive unit 281. As a result, a torque-oriented motor can be selected as the first drive unit 281 that requires a large rated torque even if the rated speed is small, and the rated speed can be selected as the second drive unit 282 even if the rated torque is small. It is possible to select a motor that emphasizes the speed as long as it is large. That is, for these drive units 281 and 282, it is not necessary to select a motor having a large rated torque and rated speed. Therefore, the cost burden can be reduced for the motors used as the drive units 281 and 282.

<Spring member 291>
The first decoration device 232 includes a spring member 291 as urging means for urging the link portions 242 and 243 in the direction in which the movement effect portion 243b moves to the effect position PA2. The spring member 291 is a type of coil spring that extends in a straight line, and is a tension spring that exerts an urging force in the direction of contraction in a tensioned state. The spring member 291 assists the rotation of the link parts 242 and 243 by the first drive part 281 and the second drive part 282, and the biasing force of the spring member 291 is applied to the link parts 242 and 243. For example, compared with the case where the link parts 242 and 243 are rotated only by the driving force of the drive parts 281 and 282, the acceleration and the maximum speed at which the link parts 242 and 243 start to rotate are increased.

  The spring member 291 is connected to the first link portion 242 and the main body portion 241 in a pulled state. The first link part 242 has a link side hooking part 292 where one end of the spring member 291 is hooked, and the main body part 241 has a main body side hooking part 293 where the other end of the spring member 291 is hooked. The spring member 291 is provided in a state of being spanned between the link side hooking portion 292 and the main body side hooking portion 293. The link side hooking portion 292 and the main body side hooking portion 293 are positions at which the distance between the hooking portions 292 and 293 approaches as the first link portion 242 rotates in the direction in which the moving effect portion 243b moves to the effect position PA2. Is arranged.

  The length dimension of the spring member 291 is smaller than the separation distance between the link side hook portion 292 and the main body side hook portion 293. For this reason, the spring member 291 is in the direction in which the link side hooking portion 292 and the main body side hooking portion 293 approach each other until the movement effect portion 243b moves to the effect position PA2 (direction in which the movement effect portion 243b moves to the effect position PA2). Thus, the urging force is continuously applied to the first link portion 242.

  The main body side hooking portion 293 is provided on the side opposite to the appearance direction of the movement effect portion 243b (effect position PA2) with the main body guide portion 251 interposed therebetween. Has been placed. In this case, the main body side hooking portion 293 is disposed below the reverse rotation stopper 269 and the main body side shaft portion 262. The main body side hook portion 293 has a convex portion protruding from the main body portion 241 toward the front of the gaming machine, and the end portion of the spring member 291 is fixed by a screw or the like while being hooked on the convex portion. . In this case, the spring member 291 is rotatable along the front surface of the main body portion 241 with the convex portion of the main body side hooking portion 293 as an axis.

  The first link portion 242 has a bulging portion 294 that bulges toward the opposite side of the effect position PA2 in the direction intersecting (substantially orthogonal to) the first shaft portion 244 to the third shaft portion 246. The bulging portion 294 has a link side hooking portion 292. The link side hooking portion 292 has a convex portion protruding from the bulging portion 294 toward the front of the gaming machine, and the end of the spring member 291 is fixed by a screw or the like while being hooked on the convex portion. Yes. In this case, the spring member 291 is rotatable along the front surface of the bulging portion 294 with the convex portion of the link side hooking portion 292 as an axis.

  The bulging portion 294 is in a state where a portion of the first link portion 242 that is closer to the first shaft portion 244 than the link-side shaft portion 263 bulges along the front surface of the main body portion 241, and The width dimension (vertical dimension) of the bulging part 294 is gradually reduced toward it. The link side hooking part 292 is disposed at the tip of the bulging part 294, and the bulging dimension of the bulging part 294 is substantially the same as the width dimension of the main body part 241. That is, the separation distance between the first shaft portion 244 and the link side hook portion 292 is substantially the same as the width dimension of the main body portion 241.

  The spring member 291 extends in the vertical direction along the front surface of the main body portion 241 on the opposite side of the main body side shaft portion 262 and the main body guide portion 251 with the reverse rotation stopper 269 interposed therebetween. Here, since the turning radius of the link side hooking part 292 is as large as possible, which is substantially the same as the width of the main body part 241, the movement of the link side hooking part 292 as the first link part 242 turns. The direction is almost limited to the vertical direction. In this case, the spring member 291 can be expanded and contracted in the width direction of the main body portion 241 without protruding to the main body side shaft portion 262 side than the reverse rotation stopper 269, thereby the intermediate arm 261. Interference between expansion and contraction and sliding movement of the second shaft portion 245 and expansion and contraction of the spring member 291 is avoided.

  In addition, the fact that the turning radius of the link-side hooking portion 292 is made as large as possible is that the urging force of the spring member 291 is used as the turning force for turning the first link portion 242. It will also increase. Here, when the first shaft portion 244 is a fulcrum, the link side hooking portion 292 is a power point, and the third shaft portion 246 is an action point, the separation distance between the fulcrum and the force point is the distance between the fulcrum and the action point. Since the ratio is increased as much as possible, the urging force of the spring member 291 can increase the acceleration at the start of rotation of the link portions 242 and 243 and the maximum speed as much as possible.

<Transmitter 301, 302>
The first decoration device 232 includes a first transmission unit 301 that transmits a driving force of the first driving unit 281 to the first link unit 242, and a second link unit 243 (second shaft unit 245) that transmits the driving force of the second driving unit 282. And a second transmission unit 302 that transmits to Here, the first transmission unit 301 and the second transmission unit 302 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the main body 241. FIG. 12 is a view of the main body 241 as seen from the front side.

  As shown in FIG. 12, the first transmission unit 301 and the second transmission unit 302 are mounted on the main body 241. The main body 241 has a front case body 311 that forms the front surface thereof and a back case body 312 that forms the back surface thereof. The transmission portions 301 and 302 are accommodated between the case bodies 311 and 312. Yes. The front case body 311 and the back case body 312 are fixed to each other with screws or the like in a state where they are overlapped with each other in the thickness direction (front-rear direction). The case bodies 311 and 312 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin material or the like, and the transmission portions 301 and 302 disposed between the case bodies 311 and 312 are visible through the case bodies 311 and 312. Yes. In this case, in the main body part 241, since the internal structure including the transmission parts 301 and 302 is visible, the maintenance work of the main body part 241 is facilitated.

<First transmission unit 301>
The first transmission unit 301 includes a first gear 321 fixed to the rotation shaft portion of the first drive unit 281, an arm side gear 322 fixed to the main body side shaft portion 262 of the intermediate arm 261, and the state of the intermediate arm 261 And a detection gear 323 for detecting. The gears 321 to 323 are arranged along the plate surface of the main body 241 with the respective rotation axes extending in the thickness direction of the main body 241. The first gear 321 is a drive gear that rotates together with the rotary shaft portion of the first drive unit 281. The arm-side gear 322 and the detection gear 323 are arranged at positions where their teeth mesh with the teeth of the first gear 321, and are driven gears that rotate as the first gear 321 rotates.

  The driving force transmitted from the first drive unit 281 to the first transmission unit 301 is transmitted to the first link unit 242 via the intermediate arm 261. In the first transmission unit 301, the first gear 321 and the arm side gear 322 rotate in conjunction with the driving of the first drive unit 281, and the main body side shaft portion 262 rotates with the rotation of the arm side gear 322. By rotating, the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts. Incidentally, when the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts with the rotation of the first link portion 242, the gears 321 to 323 also rotate with the expansion and contraction.

  The first drive unit 281 corresponds to an expansion / contraction drive unit that expands and contracts the intermediate arm 261, and the first transmission unit 301 serves as an arm transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the first drive unit 281 to the second arm unit 265. Equivalent to. The second transmission unit 302 corresponds to link transmission means for transmitting the driving force to the second shaft unit 245 and rotating the second link unit 243 to shift the intermediate arm 261 from the contraction restricted state to the contraction permitted state. To do.

  As described above, in the intermediate arm 261, the intermediate shaft portion 266 of the first arm portion 264 can slide along the arm long hole 265 a of the second arm portion 265. Therefore, when the first drive unit 281 is driven in the direction in which the intermediate arm 261 is extended, when the rotation direction of the first arm unit 264 approaches or coincides with the longitudinal direction of the arm long hole 265a, the intermediate shaft unit 266 is linked. As a result, the intermediate arm 261 does not extend any more even if the first arm portion 264 is rotated by the driving force of the first driving portion 281. With respect to the intermediate arm 261, this state is referred to as a folded state. The intermediate arm 261 shifts to the folded state when the rotation shaft portion of the first driving unit 281 reaches a predetermined folding angle (for example, 90 degrees). In the first drive unit 281, the folding angle is smaller than the effect angle.

  When the intermediate arm 261 is extended from the contracted state, when the crossing angle between the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 reaches 90 degrees, the rotation direction of the first arm portion 264 is changed. It coincides with the longitudinal direction of the arm long hole 265a. Therefore, when the crossing angle of these arm portions 264 and 265 approaches 90 degrees, the intermediate shaft portion 266 can be slid relative to the second arm portion 265.

  Further, when an external force is applied to the second link portion 243 in a direction in which the link side shaft portion 263 approaches the intermediate shaft portion 266, the second link portion 243 may slide along the longitudinal direction of the arm long hole 265a. It becomes possible. In this case, although the first arm portion 264 is not rotated, the intermediate arm 261 is contracted, and the separation distance between the main body side shaft portion 262 and the link side shaft portion 263 is reduced. Therefore, when the crossing angle between the first arm part 264 and the second arm part 265 is smaller than 90 degrees, such as when the intermediate arm 261 is in an extended state, even if the first arm part 264 is not rotated, The first arm portion 264 can be rotated in a direction in which the link side shaft portion 263 approaches the main body side shaft portion 262.

  The main body 241 is provided with an arm sensor 325 that detects the state of the intermediate arm 261. The detection gear 323 has a detected part (not shown) to be detected by the arm sensor 325, and the arm sensor 325 can detect that the detected part is at a predetermined position. Yes. The arm sensor 325 is disposed on the back side of the detection gear 323, and the detected portion is a convex portion protruding from the detection gear 323 toward the back side arm sensor 325.

  The detected unit is detected by the arm sensor 325 when the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state (when the movement effect unit 243b is in the retracted position PA1), and when the intermediate arm 261 is extended from the contracted state (the movement effect unit 243b). Is detected from the retreat position PA1). The detected portion is not detected again by the arm sensor 325 until the intermediate arm 261 shifts from the contracted state to the extended state. Here, the gear ratio between the first gear 321 and the detection gear 323 is such that the detection gear 323 rotates by an angle smaller than 360 degrees (for example, 120 degrees) before the intermediate arm 261 shifts from the contracted state to the extended state. It is supposed to be large. Further, the detected portion is arranged on the peripheral edge side of the detection gear 323 and moves along the circumferential direction of the detection gear 323 as the detection gear 323 rotates.

<Second transmission unit 302>
The second transmission unit 302 is coupled to the second gear 331 fixed to the rotation shaft of the second drive unit 282, the pinion gear 332 that rotates in conjunction with the second gear 331, and the rotational motion of the pinion gear 332. And a rack 333 that performs a straight movement. The second gear 331 and the pinion gear 332 are arranged along the plate surface of the main body 241 with their respective rotation axes extending in the thickness direction of the main body 241. The rack 333 is a long plate material extending along the plate surface of the main body portion 241 and has a plurality of teeth arranged along the long side thereof.

  The second gear 331 is a drive gear that rotates together with the rotary shaft portion of the second drive unit 282. The pinion gear 332 is disposed at a position where its teeth mesh with the teeth of the second gear 331 and the rack 333, and is a driven gear that rotates as the second gear 331 rotates. The rack 333 is a driven rack that moves linearly as the pinion gear 332 rotates.

  The rack 333 is arranged in a direction extending along the longitudinal direction of the main body guide portion 251, and is a moving member that moves along the main body guide portion 251. In this case, the rack 333 is disposed on the back side of the main body guide portion 251 with the front case body 311 of the main body portion 241 interposed therebetween. The main body 241 has a guide groove (not shown) that guides the moving direction of the rack 333, and the rack 333 is provided in a state of entering the guide groove. The guide groove is provided in the front case body 311 of the main body 241 and is formed by denting the inner side surface (surface on the back case body 312 side) of the front case body 311. The guide groove extends along the main body guide portion 251.

  A second shaft portion 245 is connected to the rack 333 via a main body guide portion 251, and the second shaft portion 245 moves along the main body guide portion 251 when the rack 333 slides. The main body guide portion 251 is formed by a main body long hole 251a formed in the front case body 311 of the main body portion 241, and the second shaft portion 245 is formed in the front case body 311 without being detached from the main body long hole 251a. It is attached.

  The main body long hole 251a penetrates the front case body 311 in the front-rear direction, and the second shaft portion 245 is provided in a state of being inserted through the main body long hole 251a and sandwiching the main body guide portion 251 from the front and rear. . In this case, the second shaft portion 245 is engaged with the front shaft piece 245a inserted into the main body long hole 251a from the front while being hooked on the front surface of the front case body 311 and rearward while being hooked on the back surface of the front case body 311. The rear shaft piece 245b is inserted into the main body long hole 251a, and the front shaft piece 245a and the rear shaft piece 245b are fixed by screws or the like.

  The movable range of the second shaft portion 245 is limited in the vertical direction by the main body long hole 251a. Of the inner peripheral surface of the main body long hole 251a, the ceiling surface 251b facing downward restricts the second shaft portion 245 contacting from below to move upward from the uppermost position HA1. The stopper 252 is the ceiling surface 251b. The bottom surface 251c facing upward is a lowering restricting portion that restricts the second shaft portion 245 in contact with the upper portion from moving downward from the lowest position LA1. As described above, since the second shaft portion 245 is at or near the bottom dead center when it is at the lowermost position LA1, it is lower than the lowermost position LA1 even if the lowering is not restricted by the bottom surface 251c. It is also assumed that there is no movement.

  The second shaft portion 245 can move together with the rack 333 while being hooked on the rack 333 inside the main body portion 241. The rack 333 is formed with a hooking hole 335 into which the second shaft portion 245 enters from the front. The hook hole 335 is a long hole extending in the moving direction of the rack 333 and penetrates the rack 333 in the front-rear direction. In the second shaft portion 245, the entering portion (not shown) entering the hooking hole 335 is a projecting portion protruding toward the rack 333, and this projecting portion is formed by a part of the rear shaft piece 245b. ing.

  The hook hole 335 is disposed at a position overlapping the front and rear of the main body guide portion 251 (main body long hole 251a) in the width direction of the main body portion 241. The width dimension of the hook hole 335 is substantially the same as the width dimension of the main body long hole 251a. The length dimension of the hooking hole 335 is smaller than the length dimension of the main body elongated hole 251a, but larger than the vertical dimension of the entering portion of the second shaft portion 245. For this reason, the second shaft portion 245 can move up and down relatively with respect to the hook hole 335 in a state of entering the hook hole 335.

  In the rack 333, the side surface extending in the vertical direction among the inner peripheral surfaces of the hooking holes 335 serves as limiting means for limiting the moving direction of the second shaft portion 245 in the vertical direction. Further, the ceiling surface 335a facing downward of the inner peripheral surface of the hooking hole 335 is a downward pushing portion that pushes the second shaft portion 245 downward when the rack 333 moves downward. The facing bottom surface 335b is an upward pushing portion that pushes the second shaft portion 245 upward when the rack 333 moves upward.

  When the second shaft portion 245 moves upward, the movement effect portion 243b moves toward the effect position PA2, and therefore the bottom surface 335b has the second axis in the direction in which the movement effect portion 243b moves to the effect position PA2. The ceiling surface 335a corresponds to a second pressing portion that presses the second shaft portion 245 in a direction in which the movement effect portion 243b returns to the retracted position PA1. The ceiling surface 335a and the bottom surface 335b are opposed to each other with the second shaft portion 245 interposed therebetween, and the separation distance between the ceiling surface 335a and the bottom surface 335b is larger than the height dimension of the second shaft portion 245. For this reason, the 2nd axial part 245 will not be in the state which is simultaneously contacting both the ceiling surface 335a and the bottom face 335b.

  The rack 333 is movable in a range in which at least a part of the hooking hole 335 overlaps with the main body long hole 251a in the front-rear direction. When the rack 333 is at the highest position HA2 which is the highest position in the movable range (see FIG. 14C), the rack 333 is placed between the bottom surface 335b of the hook hole 335 and the ceiling surface 251b of the main body long hole 251a. The biaxial portion 245 is sandwiched. In this case, the second shaft portion 245 pushed up by the rack 333 is held at the uppermost position HA1 by being hooked on the ceiling surface 251b of the main body long hole 251a, and the rack 333 is more than the uppermost position HA2. The upward movement is restricted by the second shaft portion 245.

  Incidentally, since the rack 333 can slide relative to the second shaft portion 245, for example, even when the second shaft portion 245 is at the uppermost position HA1, the rack 333 is hooked from the uppermost position HA2 of the rack 333. It is possible to move downward to a position where the ceiling surface 335 a of the hole 335 contacts the second shaft portion 245.

  On the other hand, when the rack 333 is in the lowest position LA2 that is the lowest position in the movable range (see FIG. 13A), the bottom surface 335b of the hook hole 335 is substantially the same as the bottom surface 251c of the main body long hole 251a. In the height position. In this case, the second shaft portion 245 is placed on the bottom surface 335b of the hooking hole 335. Unlike the case where the second shaft portion 245 is spaced upward from the bottom surface 335b, the rack 333 is The bottom surface 335b of the hooking hole 335 immediately pushes up the second shaft portion 245 by moving toward the. In addition, this state can also be referred to as a state in which the rack 333 is moved to the lowest position LA2 when the second shaft portion 245 pushes down the bottom surface 335b of the hooking hole 335.

  A rack sensor 337 for detecting that the rack 333 is at the lowest position LA2 is attached to the main body 241. The rack 333 has a detected portion 338 to be detected by the rack sensor 337. The rack sensor 337 detects that the detected portion 338 is at a predetermined position, so that the rack 333 is at the lowest position LA2. Detect that there is. The rack sensor 337 is fixed to the front case body 311 of the main body 241 with screws or the like in a state of being arranged on the front side of the rack 333, and the detected part 338 is forward from the rack 333 toward the detected part 338. It is made into the convex part which protruded.

  The detected portion 338 is disposed below the hook hole 335 in the rack 333, and is detected by the rack sensor 337 when the rack 333 is at the lowest position LA2, and the rack 333 is moved upward from the lowest position LA2. If not detected. The detected part 338 protrudes to the front side of the main body part 241 through the main body long hole 251a, and the protruding part is a part detected by the rack sensor 337. The front case body 311 of the main body 241 is formed with a slit extending downward from the main body long hole 251a. When the rack 333 moves toward the lowest position LA2, the detected portion 338 It is detected by the rack sensor 337 by moving through the slit to a position below the bottom surface 251c of the long hole 251a.

  The detected portion 338 extends along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rack 333, and has a predetermined length dimension in the vertical direction. This length dimension is larger than the length dimension of the detection range of the rack sensor 337 in the vertical direction. In this case, the rack sensor 337 can detect the detected portion 338 not only when the rack 333 is at the lowest position LA2 but also when the rack 333 is slightly higher than the lowest position LA2. . For example, in a configuration in which the length dimension of the detected portion 338 is extremely small in the vertical direction, the detected portion 338 exists at a position outside the detection range of the rack sensor 337 even though the rack 333 is at the lowest position LA2. As a result, there is a concern that the rack sensor 337 cannot detect the detected portion 338.

<Operation of First Decoration Device 232>
Next, the operation | movement aspect of the 1st decoration apparatus 232 is demonstrated, referring FIG. 10, FIG. 13, FIG. FIG. 13 is an operation diagram when the first decoration device 232 shifts from the retracted state to the effect state, and FIG. 14 is an operation diagram when the first decoration device 232 shifts from the effect state to the retracted state. 13 and 14, the height position of the axis of the second shaft portion 245 is shown as the uppermost position HA1 or the lowermost position LA1, and the height position of the lower end of the rack 333 is shown as the uppermost position HA2 or the lowermost position LA2. As shown. Further, the illustration of the front case body 311 is omitted and a schematic view of the internal structure of the main body 241 is shown, and the gears 321 to 323, 331, and 332 of the transmission portions 301 and 302 and the rack 333 are not shown. Yes. Furthermore, in the enlarged views of FIGS. 13A to 13C and FIGS. 14A and 14B, the positional relationship between the second shaft portion 245 and the hooking hole 335 is shown, and the enlarged view of FIG. In the drawing, the positional relationship between the intermediate shaft portion 266 and the arm long hole 265a in the intermediate arm 261 is shown.

<Appearance of the movement production unit 243b>
First, the case where the movement effect part 243b moves from the retreat position PA1 toward the effect position PA2 in the first decoration device 232 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 13A, when the first decoration device 232 is in the retracted state (when the movement effect unit 243b is in the retracted position PA1), the second shaft portion 245 and the rack 333 are each in the lowest position LA1. , LA2. In this case, since the intermediate arm 261 in the contracted state restricts the rotation of the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243, the link portions 242, 243 are rotated by the biasing force of the spring member 291. The movement effect unit 243b does not appear in front of the display screen 75a.

  The first decoration device 232 shifts to the effect state when both the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are driven in a direction (forward rotation) to move the movement effect unit 243b to the effect position PA2. When the driving units 281 and 282 start driving simultaneously, as described above, the acceleration of the first driving unit 281 is larger than the acceleration of the second driving unit 282. For this reason, the operation of rotating the link portions 242, 243 by the extension of the intermediate arm 261 with the start of driving of the first drive unit 281 causes the rack 333 to move to the second shaft portion with the start of driving of the second drive unit 282. This is performed earlier than the operation of pushing up 245 to rotate the link parts 242 and 243.

  During a predetermined period from the start of driving of the driving units 281 and 282, the rising speed of the second shaft portion 245 accompanying the driving of the first driving unit 281 is higher than the rising speed of the rack 333 accompanying the driving of the second driving unit 282. Thus, as shown in FIG. 13B, the second shaft portion 245 is spaced upward from the bottom surface 335b of the hooking hole 335 of the rack 333. In this case, for example, unlike the configuration in which the second shaft portion 245 is fixed without being slid with respect to the rack 333, the second drive portion 282 does not perform the work of lifting the rack 333. . That is, the driving force of the first drive unit 281 operates the rack 333, the pinion gear 332, the second gear 331, etc. of the second transmission unit 302, or rotates the rotation shaft portion of the second drive unit 282. It is not used and is efficiently used to rotate the first link portion 242.

  In addition, since the urging force of the spring member 291 is applied to the first link part 242, the link parts 242 and 243 rotate at a speed higher than the rotation speed obtained by the driving force of the first driving part 281. . Therefore, it is possible to increase the speed of movement of the moving effect unit 243b toward the effect position PA2 during a period in which the link units 242 and 243 are rotated by the driving force of the first drive unit 281.

  After that, when the driving speed of the first driving unit 281 reaches the maximum speed, the rising speed of the rack 333 accompanying the driving of the second driving unit 282 is eventually increased by the second shaft unit 245 accompanying the driving of the first driving unit 281. As shown in FIG. 13C, the rack 333 that has risen with a delay from the second shaft portion 245 catches up with the second shaft portion 245. In this case, since the rack 333 is pushed up in a state where the second shaft portion 245 is hooked on the ceiling surface 335a of the hooking hole 335, the driving of the second driving portion 282 is performed at a speed higher than the speed due to the driving force of the first driving portion 281. The link parts 242 and 243 are rotated by the force. Accordingly, the movement effect unit 243b moves to the effect position PA2 at a speed higher than the moving speed of the movement effect unit 243b by the driving force of the first drive unit 281.

  Since the biasing force of the spring member 291 is applied to the first link portion 242 in addition to the driving of the drive portions 281 and 282, the link portions 242 and 243 are rotated by the driving force of the second drive portion 282. It rotates at a speed greater than the speed. Thereby, the movement production | presentation part 243b will appear vigorously ahead of the display screen 75a.

  Further, the first drive unit 281 is stopped when the rack 333 catches up with the second shaft unit 245. Here, in a state where the rack 333 pushes up the second shaft portion 245, the rotation shaft portion of the first drive portion 281 rotates at a speed faster than the rated speed of the first drive portion 281. In the first drive unit 281, an electromotive force is generated in a direction of decreasing the rotation speed exceeding the low speed (direction of preventing rotation of the rotation shaft unit). That is, the first drive unit 281 functions like a power generation brake that exerts a deterrent against the ascent of the second shaft portion 245 (rotation of the link portions 242, 243). Therefore, when the driving force of the second driving unit 282 is applied to the driving speed of the first driving unit 281, the driving of the first driving unit 281 is stopped, so that the rotation of the link units 242 and 243 is performed. The speed of movement can be further increased.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 14A, when the rack 333 reaches the uppermost position HA2, the second shaft portion 245 pushed up by the rack 333 also reaches the uppermost position HA1, and the movement effect portion 243b becomes the effect position. It moves to PA2. In this case, the rotation of the link parts 242 and 243 stops suddenly when the second shaft part 245 is hooked on the ascending stopper 252 of the main body guide part 251 (the ceiling surface 251b of the main body long hole 251a). That is, the movement of the movement effect unit 243b stops suddenly. When the movement effect portion 243b is at the effect position PA2, the ceiling surface 335a of the hook hole 335 of the rack 333 is spaced upward from the second shaft portion 245.

  The drive units 281 and 282 stop driving when the movement effect unit 243b moves to the effect position PA2. When the drive units 281 and 282 stop driving, the angle between the first link unit 242 and the main body unit 241 decreases due to the biasing force of the spring member 291 (the direction in which the movement effect unit 243b moves to the retreat position PA1). Therefore, there is a concern that the first link portion 242 rotates. On the other hand, as described above, when the movement effect unit 243b is at the effect position PB2, the intersection angle (link angle α1) between the first link unit 242 and the second link unit 243 is smaller than 90 degrees. And the fact that the second shaft portion 245 is caught by the ascending stopper 252 prevents the first link portion 242 from rotating against the urging force of the spring member 291. Therefore, even when the driving units 281 and 282 are stopped, the movement effect unit 243b is held at the effect position PA2.

<Storage of the movement effect unit 243b>
Next, the case where the movement effect unit 243b returns from the effect position PA2 to the retreat position PA1 will be described.

  When the first decoration device 232 shifts to the retracted state, first, only the second drive unit 282 of the drive units 281 and 282 is driven in a direction (reverse rotation) in which the movement effect unit 243b moves to the retracted position PA1. In this case, the rack 333 moves downward with the start of driving of the second drive unit 282, while the second shaft portion 245 does not move because the first drive unit 281 does not start driving. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 14B, the ceiling surface 335a of the hooking hole 335 of the rack 333 is hooked on the second shaft portion 245 from above, and the rack 333 that moves downward in this state is the first. The biaxial part 245 is pulled down. In this case, the link portions 242 and 243 rotate against the urging force of the spring member 291 in the direction in which the movement effect portion 243b moves to the retreat position PA1.

  When the second shaft portion 245 moves downward while the first drive portion 281 is not driven, the link side shaft portion 263 is moved in a state where the intermediate arm 261 is not folded as the first link portion 242 rotates. It moves in a direction approaching the intermediate shaft portion 266 (see FIG. 14C). In this case, even if the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 do not rotate, the intermediate arm 261 moves relative to the intermediate shaft portion 266 along the arm long hole 265a. The separation distance between H.266 and the link-side shaft portion 263 is reduced, and the intermediate arm 261 is contracted. That is, unlike the configuration in which the intermediate shaft portion 266 is fixed in a state in which it does not slide and move with respect to the second arm portion 265, the first link portion 242 rotates in the direction approaching the main body side shaft portion 262. The blocking of the arm 261 and the rotation of the first arm portion 264 around the main body side shaft portion 262 with the rotation of the first link portion 242 are avoided.

  In particular, even if the second shaft portion 245 is pulled down by the rack 333, the first link portion 242 does not have to be rotated, so that the driving force of the second drive portion 282 rotates the first link portion 242. In addition, since it is not used to rotate the gears 321 to 323 of the first transmission unit 301 and to rotate the rotation shaft portion of the first driving unit 281, the driving force of the second driving unit 282 is used as the first link unit 242. In addition, the second link portion 243 is efficiently used for turning.

  And as shown in FIG.14 (c), when the rack 333 descend | falling with the driving force of the 2nd drive part 282 reaches | attains the lowest position LA2, while the 2nd drive part 282 is stopped, The driving of the first driving unit 281 is started. Note that the rack sensor 337 detects the detected portion 338 of the rack 333, thereby detecting that the rack 333 has reached the lowest position LA2. Further, the position of the movement effect unit 243b when the rack 333 reaches the lowest position LA2 corresponds to the switching position. In this case, the second shaft portion 245 is still in a state of being hooked on the ceiling surface 335 a of the hook hole 335 of the rack 333.

  When the driving of the first driving unit 281 is started, the first arm unit 264 is rotated as the driving of the first driving unit 281 starts, so that the intermediate shaft unit 266 is linked along the arm long hole 265a. The intermediate arm 261 starts to be folded when the intermediate shaft portion 266 moves to the side away from the side shaft portion 263 and the intermediate shaft portion 266 is caught by the end of the arm long hole 265a. Then, as the intermediate arm 261 is folded, the link parts 242 and 243 are rotated, so that the second shaft part 245 moves downward in the hooking hole 335 of the rack 333 and the intermediate arm 261 is contracted. The lowest position LA1 is reached by shifting.

  The first drive unit 281 stops driving when the intermediate arm 261 shifts to the contracted state. Note that the arm sensor 325 detects the detected portion of the detection gear 323, thereby detecting that the intermediate arm 261 has shifted to the contracted state.

  The movement of the second shaft portion 245 in the hooking hole 335 of the rack 333 as the first driving portion 281 is driven means that the driving force of the first driving portion 281 causes the rack 333 and the pinion gear of the second transmission portion 302 to move. 332, the second gear 331 and the like are operated, and the rotation shaft portion of the second drive unit 282 is not used for rotation, but the link units 242 and 243 are efficiently used for rotation. Become.

  Further, when the movement effect unit 243b is moved from the effect position PA2 to the retreat position PA1, the second driving unit 282 and the first driving unit 281 are not driven at the same time, so that the power consumed by the first decoration device 232 is reduced. Peak value can be reduced. Thus, for example, in a game hall in which a plurality of pachinko machines 10 on which the first decoration device 232 is mounted are installed, even if the first decoration device 232 of each pachinko machine 10 simultaneously shifts from the effect state to the retracted state, the game hall It can be avoided that the peak value of the power consumption at is excessively large.

<Moving effect unit 243b>
The movement effect part 243b of the second link part 243 is different in shape and size between when it is at the retracted position PA1 and when it is at the effect position PA2. Here, the configuration related to the movement effect unit 243b will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the second link portion 243.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the movement effect unit 243b includes an intermediate member 341 that forms an intermediate part of the movement effect unit 243b, an upper member 342 that forms an upper part, and a lower member 343 that forms a lower part. have. The intermediate member 341 is attached so as not to move with respect to the link portion main body 243a, and the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 are movable in directions away from each other with the intermediate member 341 interposed therebetween. The upper member 342 has a shape and color imitating the eyes of the dog's face, the intermediate member 341 has a shape and color imitating the dog's neck, nose and upper jaw, and the lower member 343 has the dog's face and shape. It has the shape and color imitating the lower jaw of the face.

  When the movement effect unit 243b is in the retracted position, the lower member 343 is disposed on the effect position PA2 side with respect to the intermediate member 341, and the upper member 342 is opposite to the effect position PA2 with respect to the intermediate member 341. Arranged on the side. The lower surface of the lower member 343 (the surface on the effect position PA2 side) extends in the vertical direction along the peripheral edge of the central opening 72 of the game board 60a when the movement effect unit 243b is at the retracted position PA1. It is arranged at a position where it can be seen from the front of the gaming machine through the opening 72. Therefore, an auxiliary display portion 343a is provided on the lower surface of the lower member 343 to enhance the effect by being visually recognized even when the movement effect portion 243b is in the retracted position PA1. The auxiliary display portion 343a displays characters such as “Caution of a brutal dog”, and is arranged at a position that can be read from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 72 when the movement effect portion 243b is at the retracted position PA1.

  The movement effect unit 243b includes an upper base 345 and a lower base 346 attached to the link body 243a as bases for the upper member 342 and the lower member 343. These bases 345 and 346 are all disposed on the front side of the link portion main body 243a, and are attached to the link portion main body 243a so as to be displaceable. Here, the intermediate member 341 is fixed to the link portion main body 243a without being displaced with respect to the link portion main body 243a. In this case, the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 are displaced relative to the intermediate member 341 by the base members 345 and 346 being displaced relative to the link body 243a.

  The movement effect unit 243b can shift to a reduced state that is reduced as a whole and a non-reduced state that is not reduced as a whole. The upper member 342 and the lower member 343 are expanded to have the movement effect unit 243b expanded by moving away from the reduced positions Q1a and Q1b (see FIG. 16A) where the movement effect unit 243b is reduced by approaching each other. It is possible to move to positions Q2a and Q2b (see FIG. 16C), and the movement effect unit 243b is reduced by moving the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 to the reduced positions Q1a and Q1b, respectively. The state is shifted to the extended state by moving to the extended positions Q2a and Q2b.

  The movement effect unit 243b has a shape imitating the dog's face as a whole when in the expanded state. On the other hand, when the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 enter the inside of the intermediate member 341 in the contracted state, the vertical dimension of the movement effect unit 243b is reduced, and the dog's face is crushed up and down. It is in such a state.

  In the second link portion 243, the upper base 345 and the lower base 346 move toward each other, so that the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 move to the reduced positions Q1a and Q1b, respectively. By moving the base 346 away from each other, the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 move to the extended positions Q2a and Q2b.

<Operation converter 355>
The second link part 243 has a link mechanism that moves the upper base 345 and the lower base 346 by rotating the second link part 243 relative to the first link part 242. The link mechanism is mounted on the link unit main body 243a. The link portion main body 243a has a front case body 351 that forms the front surface thereof and a back case body 352 that forms the back surface thereof, and the first link portion 242 is interposed between the case bodies 351 and 352. An operation conversion unit 355 that converts the rotation of the second link unit 243 into the movement of the upper base 345 and the lower base 346 is housed. The front case body 351 and the back case body 352 are fixed to each other with screws or the like in a state where they are overlapped in the respective thickness directions.

  The case bodies 351 and 352 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin material or the like, and the operation conversion unit 355 and the like disposed between the case bodies 351 and 352 can be visually recognized through the case bodies 351 and 352. Yes. In this case, since the internal structure of the link part main body 243a including the operation converting part 355 is visible, the maintenance work of the link part main body 243a is facilitated.

  The motion conversion unit 355 includes a third gear 361 fixed to the third shaft portion 246, an upper gear 362 that supports the upper member 342, and a lower gear 363 that supports the lower member 343. The third gear 361 is not a gear that rotates relative to the third shaft portion 246, but is fixed to the first link portion 242 via the third shaft portion 246. On the other hand, when the 2nd link part 243 rotates, it is a gear which rotates relatively with respect to the 2nd link part 243. Each axis of the third gear 361, the upper gear 362, and the lower gear 363 extends along the direction in which the link body 243 a and the bases 345 and 346 are aligned in parallel with the axis of the third shaft 246.

  The motion conversion unit 355 has an auxiliary gear 364 provided at a position that meshes with the third gear 361. In the motion conversion unit 355, a plurality of (for example, two) upper gears 362 are provided, and the auxiliary gear 364 is disposed at a position that meshes with one upper gear 362 among the plurality of upper gears 362. The plurality of upper gears 362 are arranged at positions that mesh with each other along the width direction of the link body 243a (the width direction of the dog's face). The lower gear 363 is disposed at a position that directly meshes with the third gear 361. Therefore, when the third gear 361 rotates relative to the second link portion 243, the upper gear 362 and the lower gear 363 rotate with the rotation of the third gear 361, respectively.

  Each upper gear 362 has an upper support portion 362 a that supports the upper member 342. The upper support portion 362 a extends in a rod shape from the upper gear 362 toward the front, and is fixed to the upper base 345 while penetrating the front case body 351. The upper support portion 362 a is disposed on the peripheral edge side of the upper gear 362 and moves along the circumferential direction of the upper gear 362 as the upper gear 362 rotates.

  The front case body 351 is formed with an upper insertion hole 371 through which the upper support portion 362a is inserted. The upper insertion hole 371 is individually provided for each upper gear 362. The upper insertion hole 371 is a curved long hole extending along the periphery of the upper gear 362, and the upper support 362a slides along the upper insertion hole 371 as the upper gear 362 rotates. It is possible to do. The rotation angle of the upper gear 362 required to move the upper member 342 to the reduced position Q1a and the extended position Q2a is smaller than 180 degrees. Both end portions of the upper insertion hole 371 are arranged along a direction intersecting with the arrangement direction of the plurality of upper gears 362 (the height direction of the link body 243a).

  The upper base 345 is in a state of being hung on the upper support portion 362a of each upper gear 362, and can move linearly in the height direction of the link portion main body 243a in that state. . An upper shaft portion 372 fixed to the upper support portion 362a with screws or the like is attached to the upper base 345 so as to be slidable along the width direction of the link portion main body 243a. An upper cross hole 373 extending in the width direction of the link main body 243 a is formed in the upper base 345, and the upper shaft portion 372 slides along the upper cross hole 373. In this case, as the upper gear 362 rotates, the upper support portion 362a moves along both the upper insertion hole 371 and the upper intersection hole 373, so that the upper base 345 is curved along the upper insertion hole 371. Instead of moving, it moves linearly in the height direction of the link portion main body 243a.

  The length dimension of the upper cross hole 373 is the same as or larger than the curved dimension of the upper insertion hole 371 (the protruding dimension of the curved portion with respect to the straight line connecting both ends of the upper insertion hole 371).

  The lower gear 363 has a lower support portion 363 a that supports the lower member 343. The lower support portion 363a extends in a rod shape from the lower gear 363 toward the front, and is fixed to the lower base 346 while penetrating the front case body 351. The lower support portion 363a is disposed on the peripheral edge side of the lower gear 363, and moves along the circumferential direction of the lower gear 363 as the lower gear 363 rotates.

  The front case body 351 is formed with a lower insertion hole 375 through which the lower support portion 363a is inserted. The lower insertion hole 375 is a curved long hole extending along the peripheral edge of the lower gear 363, and the lower support part 363 a is moved along with the rotation of the lower gear 363. It is possible to slide along. The rotation angle of the lower gear 363 required to move the lower member 343 to the reduced position Q1b and the extended position Q2b is smaller than 180 degrees. Both end portions of the lower insertion hole 375 are arranged along the height direction of the link portion main body 243a, similarly to both end portions of the upper insertion hole 371.

  The lower base 346 can move linearly in the height direction of the link portion main body 243a. A lower shaft portion 376 fixed to the lower support portion 363a with a screw or the like is attached to the lower base 346 so as to be slidable along the width direction of the link portion main body 243a. A lower cross hole 377 extending in the width direction of the link portion main body 243 a is formed in the lower base 346, and the lower shaft portion 376 slides along the lower cross hole 377. The link body 243a is provided with a lower rail portion 378 that guides the moving direction of the lower base 346, and the lower rail portion 378 is linear in the height direction of the link body 243a. It extends. In this case, as the lower gear 363 rotates, the lower support portion 363a moves along both the lower insertion hole 375 and the lower cross hole 377, so that the lower base 346 becomes the lower insertion hole 375. Instead of moving in a curved manner along the lower rail portion 378, the link portion main body 243a moves linearly in the height direction.

  The length dimension of the lower cross hole 377 is the same as or larger than the curved dimension of the lower insertion hole 375.

  The lower member 343 can be swayed relative to the lower base 346. The lower member 343 is attached to the lower base 346 via a swing member 381. The swing member 381 is disposed on the front side of the lower base 346 and is rotatable with respect to the lower base 346 around the swing shaft portion 382.

  The lower base 346 is provided with an angle limiter 383 that limits the rotation angle (swing angle) of the swing member 381 with respect to the lower base 346. The angle limiting portion 383 is a convex portion that protrudes from the lower base 346 toward the swinging member 381, and enters the angle limiting hole 384 formed in the swinging member 381. In the circumferential direction of the swing shaft portion 382, the length dimension of the angle limiting portion 383 is slightly smaller than the length dimension of the angle limiting hole 384, and the angle limiting portion 383 moves slightly with respect to the angle limiting hole 384. It is possible. In this case, the movement range of the angle limiting portion 383 is limited by the angle limiting hole 384, so that the swing member 381 swings by a predetermined angle (for example, 3 degrees) with respect to the lower base 346 around the swing shaft portion 382. Is possible.

  The swinging shaft portion 382 is disposed at a position near the end of the lower member 343 in the width direction of the link portion main body 243a, and the axis of the swinging shaft portion 382 is in the alignment direction of the lower base 346 and the swinging member 381. Extending along. In this case, the lower member 343 swings with respect to the intermediate member 341 around one end.

  In the lower member 343, the portion on the swing shaft portion 382 side (rotation proximal end side) imitates the base side of the lower jaw of the dog, and the portion on the opposite side (rotation distal end side) from the swing shaft portion 382 Is imitating the tip side of the lower jaw of the dog. In this case, the lower member 343 swings with respect to the lower base 346, thereby imitating a state in which the dog repeatedly repeats opening and closing of the mouth.

  The swing of the lower member 343 with respect to the lower base 346 is restricted when the lower member 343 is in the reduced position Q1b, and is not restricted when the lower member 343 is in the extended position Q2b. The link body 243a is provided with a sway restricting portion 385 that restricts sway by being caught by the lower member 343 when the lower member 343 is in the contracted position Q1b. The swing restricting portion 385 is a convex portion that protrudes from the link portion main body 243a toward the lower member 343, and faces the lower member 343 when the lower member 343 is at the reduced position Q1b, and the lower member. When 343 is in the extended position Q2b, it is disposed at a position that does not face the lower member 343. The swing restricting portion 385 extends from the lower rail portion 378 toward the opposite side of the lower base 346 along the front surface of the link portion main body 243a.

<Deformation of the movement production unit 243b>
Next, a modification of the movement effect unit 243b will be described. FIG. 16 is a diagram for explaining a modification of the movement effect unit 243b. In FIG. 16, in order to clarify the positional relationship between the upper base 345 and the lower base 346 with respect to the link body 243a, the movement effect part 243b is illustrated by a virtual line (two-dot chain line). Further, the height positions of the upper shaft portion 372 and the lower shaft portion 376 are illustrated as the height positions of the upper member 342 and the lower member 343.

  As shown in FIG. 16A, when the movement effect part 243b is at the retracted position PA1, the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 are both at the reduced positions Q1a and Q1b. Here, a gap is formed between the intermediate member 341 and the link portion main body 243a, and the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 at the reduced positions Q1a and Q1b are in the gap (on the back side of the intermediate member 341). It is in a state where it has entered. In this case, the width dimension (the height dimension of the dog's face) of the movement effect part 243b is substantially the same as the width dimension of the main body part 241, and the display screen 75a is displayed when the movement effect part 243b is at the retracted position PA1. It is designed not to protrude in front of.

  When the link parts 242 and 243 rotate in the direction in which the movement effect part 243b moves to the effect position PA2, the third gear 361 rotates relative to the second link part 243 together with the first link part 242. In this case, as shown in FIG. 16B, the upper support portion 362a (upper shaft portion 372) moves along the upper insertion hole 371 and the upper cross hole 373 as the third gear 361 rotates. The upper member 342 moves in a direction away from the intermediate member 341. Further, as the third gear 361 rotates, the lower support portion 363a (lower shaft portion 376) moves along the lower insertion hole 375 and the lower cross hole 377, so that the lower member 343 becomes the intermediate member. Move away from 341. The movement distance between the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 increases as the movement effect unit 243b approaches the effect position PA2, and the dog's face is expanded vertically as the entire movement effect unit 243b.

  As shown in FIG. 16C, when the movement effect unit 243b reaches the effect position PA2, the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 move to the extended positions Q2a and Q2b, respectively, so that the movement effect unit 243b. Becomes a state imitating the face of a dog as a whole. In this case, the height dimension of the movement effect part 243b is larger than the height dimension (the width dimension of the main body part 241) when the movement effect part 243b is at the retracted position PA1. Here, when the movement effect part 243b appears vigorously in front of the display screen 75a, the player becomes more surprised as the movement effect part 243b is larger. Therefore, as in the present embodiment, the configuration in which the movement effect unit 243b shifts to the expanded state with the movement to the effect position PA2 is compared to the configuration in which the movement effect unit 243b moves to the effect position PA2 in the reduced state. The production effect accompanying the appearance of the movement production unit 243b can be enhanced.

  Further, the movement effect unit 243b moves at a high speed from the retreat position PA1 to the effect position PA2, and stops suddenly at the effect position PA2. In this case, since the lower member 343 that has been rotated about the third shaft portion 246 as a part of the second link portion 243 also suddenly stops, the lower member 343 is shaken by the impact of the sudden stop. The shaft portion 382 swings around the shaft with the maximum swing width. In other words, the dog's mouth opens and closes in small increments. Thus, even after the movement effect unit 243b stops at the effect position PA2, the effect of the movement effect unit 243b can be enhanced by changing the shape of the movement effect unit 243b. In addition, the higher the appearance speed of the movement effect unit 243b, the greater the impact applied to the lower member 343 with the sudden stop of the movement effect unit 243b, and the lower member 343 shakes violently to enhance the effect. It will be.

  When the movement effect unit 243b moves to the effect position PA2 and then returns to the retraction position PA1, the upper member 342 and the lower member 343 approach the reduction positions Q1a and Q1b as the movement effect unit 243b approaches the retraction position PA1. The part 243b shifts to a reduced state as it reaches the retracted position PA1. The movement effect part 243b protrudes to the center opening 72 side when the height dimension (height dimension of the dog's face) in the retracted position PA1 is smaller than the height dimension in the effect position PA2. It is stored in the back side of the game board 60a in a state without it. For this reason, the storage space for storing the movement effect part 243b on the back side of the game board 60a is smaller than the configuration in which the movement effect part 243b moves to the retracted position PA1 in the expanded state. That is, the movement effect unit 243b is deformed, so that both the improvement of the effect and the reduction of the storage space of the movement effect unit 243b can be realized.

  Furthermore, since the movement effect unit 243b is deformed (movement of the upper member 342 and the lower member 343) using the relative rotation of the second link unit 243 with respect to the first link unit 242, the movement effect unit There is no need to use a dedicated drive unit to deform 243b. Thereby, energy saving can be attained in the structure which the movement production | presentation part 243b deform | transforms.

<Electrical wiring of first decoration device 232>
The first decoration device 232 has a plurality of light emitting units (not shown). In the first decoration device 232, the light emitting unit emits light in accordance with the movement of the movement effect unit 243b, thereby enhancing the effect. The light emitting unit includes a light emitting body such as an LED and a light emitting substrate on which a plurality of the light emitting bodies are mounted, and is provided in the second link unit 243. In the second link portion 243, a part of the upper member 342, the lower member 343, and the intermediate member 341 is formed as a light transmissive portion by a light transmissive member, and the light emitting portion is disposed on the back side of the light transmissive portion. Has been placed. When the light emitting unit emits light, for example, the inside of the dog's mouth, the dog's eyes, and the auxiliary display unit 343a become lit.

  Electrical wiring is connected to the light emitting unit, and power is supplied to the light emitting substrate from the power supply / launch control device 191 through the electrical wiring. The electrical wiring is laid inside the link parts 242 and 243 in a state that does not hinder the rotation of the link parts 242 and 243 and the deformation of the movement effect part 243b. In the first shaft portion 244 and the third shaft portion 246, wiring through holes are formed at positions overlapping the respective axis lines, and the electric wiring is routed from the back side of the main body portion 241 to the wiring through holes of the first shaft portion 244. And enters the inside of the first link portion 242 and enters the inside of the second link portion 243 through the wiring through hole of the third shaft portion 246. In the second link part 243, a wiring space in which electrical wiring can be laid is formed between the link part main body 243a and the movement effect part 243b.

<Second decoration device 233>
The second decoration device 233 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the second decoration device 233, FIG. 18 is a schematic front view of the second decoration device 233, and FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the second link portion 403. In FIG. 18, (a) shows the case where the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state, and (b) shows the case where the second decoration device 233 is in the state between the retracted state and the effect state. (C) shows a case where the second decoration device 233 is in the effect state, and in any of (a) to (c), the rotation effect unit 403b is illustrated by a virtual line. Further, the height position of the axis of the second shaft portion 405 is indicated as the uppermost position HB1 or the lowermost position LB1, and the height position of the lower end of the rack 493 is indicated as the uppermost position HB2 or the lowermost position LB2. Furthermore, in each enlarged view of (a) to (c), the positional relationship between the second shaft portion 405 and the hooking hole 495 is shown.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the second decoration device 233 has a link mechanism similarly to the first decoration device 232. The second decoration device 233 includes a main body portion 401 attached to the unit main body 231, and a first link portion 402 and a second link portion 403 that are provided so as to be rotatable with respect to the main body portion 401. Yes. In the link mechanism of the second decoration device 233, the first link portion 402 and the second link portion 403 rotate in conjunction with each other with respect to the main body portion 401 as a fixed link. The second decoration device 233 corresponds to an effect device that enhances the effect by rotating the link portions 402 and 403. In the second decoration device 233, the first link unit 402 is disposed on the front side of the main body unit 401, and the second link unit 403 is disposed on the front side of the first link unit 402.

  The main body portion 401 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape, and extends along the vertical frame portion 231a of the unit main body 231 with the long side extending vertically. The main body portion 401 is attached to the front surface of the vertical frame portion 231a so that the thickness direction thereof is the front-rear direction of the gaming machine. In this case, the main body 401 is not overlapped with the central opening 72 of the game board 60a in the front-rear direction, but is disposed at a position covered by the game board 60a from the front of the game machine. The main body 401 is attached to a vertical frame portion 231 a different from the main body portion 241 of the first decoration device 232 among the pair of vertical frame portions 231 a of the unit main body 231. In the vertical direction, the length of the main body 401 is larger than the length of the main body 241 of the first decoration device 232.

  The first link part 402 and the second link part 403 extend along the front surface of the main body part 401. The first link portion 402 is connected to the main body portion 401 via a first shaft portion 404 (see FIGS. 18 and 20). The first link portion 402 is formed in a long plate shape, and is arranged in a direction in which the thickness direction is the thickness direction of the main body portion 401. The longitudinal dimension of the first link part 402 is larger than the longitudinal dimension of the first link part 242 of the first decoration device 232. In this case, the separation distance between the first shaft portion 404 and the second shaft portion 405 is larger than the separation distance between the first shaft portion 244 and the second shaft portion 245 in the first decoration device 232.

  The first shaft portion 404 is a fixed shaft that is fixed to each of the main body portion 401 and the first link portion 402. In the present embodiment, the first shaft portion 404 is a convex portion protruding from the first link portion 402 toward the main body portion 401 (see FIG. 20), and enters the concave portion 404a formed in the main body portion 401. The first link portion 402 is fixed. In this case, the first shaft portion 404 connects the upper end portion of the main body portion 401 and one end portion of the first link portion 402.

  The second link portion 403 is connected to the main body portion 401 via the second shaft portion 405 and is connected to the first link portion 402 via the third shaft portion 406 (see FIGS. 18 and 19). The second shaft portion 405 is fixed to the second link portion 403, while being slidable relative to the main body portion 401. The second shaft portion 405 is attached to the tip of the portion that protrudes toward the main body portion 401 in the second link portion 403.

  The second link portion 403 includes a link portion main body 403a provided with the second shaft portion 405 and the third shaft portion 406, a rotation effect portion 403b provided rotatably with respect to the link portion main body 403a, and a link portion main body. It has the link part decoration body 403c attached to the front side of 403a, and the auxiliary | assistant display part 403d attached to the side surface of the link part main body 403a. The link portion main body 403a extends from the second shaft portion 405 beyond the third shaft portion 406 along the front surface of the main body portion 401, and the main body portion 401 and the third shaft portion 406 are used as axes. The first link portion 402 can be rotated. The link part main body 403a is formed in an elongated arm shape as a whole, and corresponds to an effect arm. The second shaft portion 405 corresponds to the arm shaft portion.

  The rotation effect part 403b is formed in an elongated shape, and has a shape and color imitating a bone. Further, in the rotation effect unit 403b, a character (for example, “Bowwow”) is arranged so as to overlap the portion imitating a bone. The rotation effect part 403b is disposed on the front side of the link part main body 403a, and with the rotation of the link part main body 403a (operation of the link mechanism), the retraction position PB1 (see FIG. 6) and the effect position PB2 (FIG. 4). Go to). The retreat position PB1 and the effect position PB2 are aligned along the direction intersecting with the moving direction of the second shaft portion 405.

  The second decoration device 233 can enhance the effect by moving the rotation effect unit 403b from the retracted position PB1 to the effect position PB2. The second decoration device 233 shifts to the retracted state when the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the retracted position PB1, and moves to the effect state when the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the effect position PB2. become.

  The rotation effect part 403b is connected to the link part main body 403a via the effect shaft part 407. The effect shaft portion 407 is fixed to each of the link portion main body 403a and the rotation effect portion 403b. In the present embodiment, the effect shaft portion 407 is a convex portion that protrudes from the rotation effect portion 403b toward the link portion main body 403a, and enters the concave portion 407a formed in the link portion main body 403a. It is fixed. In this case, the effect shaft portion 407 connects the end of the link portion main body 403a opposite to the second shaft portion 405 and the central portion of the rotation effect portion 403b. The effect shaft part 407 is arranged at a position overlapping the center of gravity of the rotation effect part 403b. In addition, in the link part main body 403a, the recessed part 407a is formed because the front end surface of the part protruded toward the rotation production | presentation part 403b is dented.

  The rotation effect part 403b is displaced by rotating around the effect shaft part 407 even in a state where the link parts 402 and 403 are not rotated. In the present embodiment, the rotation effect part 403b moves to the effect position PB2. Even if the rotation effect unit 403b is rotating, if the position of the effect shaft portion 407 does not change, the rotation effect unit 403b is at the effect position PB2.

  The auxiliary display part 403d can enhance the effect by being visually recognized even when the rotation effect part 403b is at the retracted position PB1. Characters such as “WAOOON” are displayed on the auxiliary display portion 403d, and are arranged at positions that can be read from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 72 when the rotation effect portion 403b is at the retracted position PB1.

  Similarly to the first decoration device 232, the second shaft portion 405 is fixed to the link portion main body 403 a of the second link portion 403, while being movable along the plate surface of the main body portion 401. In the second link portion 403, the second shaft portion 405 is fixed to the end portion of the link portion main body 403a. When the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state, the link portion main body 403a extends upward with the second shaft portion 405 side as a lower end. In addition, the 2nd axial part 405 is attached to the front-end | tip of the part which protruded toward the main-body part 401 in the link part main body 403a.

  The third shaft portion 406 is fixed to each of the first link portion 402 and the second link portion 403, and is a moving shaft portion that moves as the link portions 402 and 403 rotate. In the present embodiment, the third shaft portion 406 is a convex portion protruding from the link portion main body 403a of the second link portion 403 toward the first link portion 402 (see FIG. 19), and is formed on the first link portion 402. The first link portion 402 is fixed to the recessed portion 406a. The third shaft portion 406 is disposed at the end of the first link portion 402 opposite to the first shaft portion 404, and is disposed at an intermediate position of the second link portion 403. In this case, the third shaft portion 406 is disposed between the second shaft portion 405 and the effect shaft portion 407 in the longitudinal direction of the link portion main body 403a.

  The axes of the first shaft portion 404, the second shaft portion 405, the third shaft portion 406, and the effect shaft portion 407 are in the thickness direction of the second decoration device 233 (the main body portion 401, the first link portion 402, and the second link portion. 403 overlap direction). In this case, the first link portion 402 and the second link portion 403 rotate along the front surface of the main body portion 401 around the shaft portions 404 to 406. Further, the rotation effect unit 403b rotates along the front surface of the second link unit 403 around the effect shaft portion 407.

  In the second decoration device 233, the second shaft portion 405 slides up and down along the main body portion 401, so that the rotation effect portion 403b can move in the gaming machine width direction (left and right direction). The second shaft portion 405 is movable within a predetermined range at a position lower than the first shaft portion 404, and the rotation effect portion 403b has a second axis as shown in FIG. When the portion 405 is at the lowest position LB1 within the movement range, it is at the retracted position PB1, and as shown in FIG. 18C, the second shaft portion 405 is moved to the highest position HB1 within the movement range. Will move to the production position PB2.

  The rotation effect unit 403b is hidden behind the gaming board 60a when in the retracted position PB1, and the side surface (auxiliary display unit 403d) on the first decoration device 232 side is visible from the front of the gaming machine. It is as much as possible (see FIG. 5). In this case, the second link unit 403 other than the rotation effect unit 403b (for example, the link unit main body 403a) and the first link unit 402 are also hidden on the back side of the game board 60a. Other than the side surface of 403b, it cannot be visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine.

  The effect position PB2 is a position closer to the first decoration device 232 than the retreat position PB1, and is an intermediate position between the pair of vertical frame portions 231a of the unit main body 231. When the rotation effect portion 403b is at the effect position PB2, the rotation effect portion 403b is exposed to the front of the display screen 75a, and can be almost visually recognized from the front of the gaming machine through the central opening 72 (see FIG. 4). In this case, unlike the first decoration device 232, in the second decoration device 233, the first link portion 402 and the link portion decoration body 403c are exposed in front of the gaming machine in addition to the rotation effect portion 403b. Yes. For this reason, the first link unit 402 and the link unit decoration body 403c are decorated to cover the internal structure of the first link unit 402 and the link unit body 403a from the front of the gaming machine.

  In the second decoration device 233, the movement range of the rotation effect unit 403b is set by structurally restricting the movement range of the second shaft portion 405, whereby the rotation effect unit 403b is set to the retreat position PB1. It can move between the production positions PB2.

  As shown in FIG. 17, the main body portion 401 has a main body guide portion 411 that guides the sliding direction of the second shaft portion 405. The second shaft portion 405 can move along the main body guide portion 411 while retaining the orientation of the axis while being locked to the main body guide portion 411. The main body guide portion 411 extends linearly in the vertical direction along the front surface of the main body portion 401 between a position spaced downward from the first shaft portion 404 and a position spaced upward from the lower end of the main body portion 401. ing.

  The first shaft portion 404 is disposed on an extension line of the main body guide portion 411. In this case, the second shaft portion 405 moves in a direction (game machine width direction) intersecting the sliding direction of the second shaft portion 405 as the first link portion 402 and the second link portion 403 rotate. It will be.

<Motion of link parts 402 and 403>
As shown in FIG. 18A, when the rotation effect portion 403b is at the retracted position PB1, the third shaft portion 406 overlaps the main body guide portion 411 in the front-rear direction (on the movement locus of the second shaft portion 405). Is arranged. In this case, as in the case where the first decoration device 232 is in the retracted state, the second shaft portion 405 is at or near the bottom dead center in the link mechanism of the second decoration device 233, and this position is the lowest position. LB1. When the main body guide part 411 is at the lowest position LB1, the main body guide part 411 extends below the position where the second shaft part 405 is present. In the present embodiment, the second shaft portion 405 has moved to the lowest position LB1 by reaching the lower end portion of the main body guide portion 411.

  Then, when the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the effect position PB2, as the first decoration device 232 moves to the effect position PA2, along with the rotation of the first link unit 402 and the second link unit 403, The third shaft portion 406 moves toward the central opening 72 side (first decoration device 232 side), and the second shaft portion 405 moves upward (first shaft portion 404).

  As shown in FIG. 18C, when the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the effect position PB2, the first shaft portion 404 is the same as when the movement effect unit 243b of the first decoration device 232 moves to the effect position PA2. In the lower position, the second shaft portion 405 and the third shaft portion 406 are arranged side by side. In this case, the second shaft portion 405 is disposed at substantially the same height position as the third shaft portion 406 or a slightly higher position, and this position is referred to as an uppermost position HB1. Further, in this case, the third shaft portion 406 is at a position farthest from the main body guide portion 411 (movement locus of the second shaft portion 405) in the link mechanism of the second decoration device 233.

  The second shaft portion 405 is restricted from moving above the uppermost position HB1. The main body guide part 411 has a rising stopper 412 that restricts the second shaft part 405 from rising from the uppermost position HB1, and when the rotation effect part 403b is at the effect position PB2, the second shaft part 405 is The lift stopper 412 is caught from below.

  When the second shaft portion 405 is at the uppermost position HB1, the second link portion 403 has a second line 403 with respect to the first straight line M1 that connects the first shaft portion 404 and the third shaft portion 406 in the first link portion 402. A second straight line M2 connecting the shaft portion 405 and the third shaft portion 406 intersects. At the intersection of the first straight line M1 and the second straight line M2, the link angle β between the first shaft portion 404 and the second shaft portion 405 is smaller than 90 degrees. Note that the second straight line M2 is not orthogonal to the tangent line of the curve drawn by the third shaft portion 406 as the movement locus with the rotation of the first link portion 402. The link angle β corresponds to the intersection angle between the first link unit 402 and the second link unit 403.

  Here, when an external force is applied to the first link unit 402 in the direction in which the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the retreat position PB1 (the retreat direction), the external force is applied in a direction to also raise the second shaft unit 405. However, since the rising of the second shaft portion 405 is regulated by the ascending stopper 412, the second shaft portion 405 is held at the uppermost position HB1. In this case, since the link angle β is smaller than 90 degrees, an external force is applied in the direction in which the second shaft portion 405 moves downward relative to the second link portion 403 (the direction away from the first shaft portion 404). Unless this is done, the link parts 402 and 403 do not rotate, and the rotation effect part 403b is also held at the effect position PB2.

  Here, the rotation effect unit 403b appears from the back side of the game board 60a to the front of the display screen 75a by moving from the retreat position PB1 to the effect position PB2, but the second shaft portion 405 is at the uppermost position. When moving to the first shaft portion 404 side beyond HB1, the rotation effect portion 403b moves again in a direction hidden behind the game board 60a as the second shaft portion 405 approaches the first shaft portion 404. . Therefore, the ascending stopper 412 has a function of holding the rotation effect portion 403b in a state where the portion exposed in front of the display screen 75a is the largest.

  The second link portion 403 has a protruding portion 431 that protrudes from the third shaft portion 406 toward the side opposite to the first shaft portion 404. The protruding portion 431 includes each of the link portion main body 403a, the rotation effect portion 403b, the link portion decoration body 403c, and the auxiliary display portion 403d, and the effect shaft portion 407 is the tip portion (third axis) of the protrusion portion 431. (The end opposite to the second shaft portion 405) with the portion 406 interposed therebetween. For this reason, when the rotation effect part 403b moves to the effect position PB2, for example, the effect shaft part 407 (the rotation effect part) from the main body part 401 is compared with a configuration in which the second link part 403 does not have the protruding portion 431. The separation distance 403b) is increased. Thereby, the presence of the rotation effect part 403b moved to the effect position PA2 can be enhanced.

<Link driver 442>
Returning to the description of FIG. 17, the second decoration device 233 includes a link driving unit 442 that drives the second link unit 403 to rotate. The link driving unit 442 is a motor such as a stepping motor having a rotating shaft portion, and the second shaft portion 405 can be moved along the main body guide portion 411 by rotating the rotating shaft portion. . The link driving unit 442 is attached to the main body 401 in a state of protruding to the back side of the main body 401. The link driving unit 442 corresponds to an arm driving unit and a slide driving unit.

  The link drive unit 442 can rotate in both forward and reverse directions, and the rotation effect unit 403b rotates the revolving position PB1 and the effect position PB2 by rotating the rotation shaft part by a predetermined effect angle (for example, 480 degrees). The link portions 402 and 403 are rotated by an angle necessary for moving between the two.

<Spring member 451>
Similar to the first decoration device 232, the second decoration device 233 uses a spring member 451 as an urging means for urging the link portions 402 and 403 in a direction (effect direction) in which the rotation effect portion 403b moves to the effect position PB2. Have. The spring member 451 is a kind of a coil spring that extends linearly, and is a tension spring that exerts an urging force in a direction in which the spring member 451 contracts in a tensioned state. The spring member 451 assists the rotation of the link units 402 and 403 by the link driving unit 442. The biasing force of the spring member 451 is applied to the link units 402 and 403, for example, driving the link driving unit 442. Compared with the case where the link portions 402 and 403 are rotated only by force, the rotation start acceleration and the maximum speed of the link portions 402 and 403 are increased.

  The spring member 451 is connected to the first link portion 402 and the main body portion 401 in a pulled state. The first link portion 402 has a link side hooking portion 452 to which one end of the spring member 451 is hooked, and the main body portion 401 has a main body side hooking portion 453 to which the other end of the spring member 451 is hooked. The spring member 451 is provided in a state of being spanned between the link side hooking portion 452 and the main body side hooking portion 453. The link side hooking portion 452 and the main body side hooking portion 453 are positions at which the distance between the hooking portions 452 and 453 approaches as the first link portion 402 rotates in the direction in which the rotation effect portion 403b moves to the effect position PB2. Is arranged.

  The length dimension of the spring member 451 is smaller than the separation distance between the link side hooking portion 452 and the main body side hooking portion 453. For this reason, the spring member 451 has a direction in which the link side hooking portion 452 and the main body side hooking portion 453 approach until the rotation effect portion 403b moves to the effect position PB2 (direction in which the rotation effect portion 403b moves to the effect position PB2). Thus, the urging force is continuously applied to the first link unit 402.

  The main body side hooking portion 453 is provided on the opposite side to the appearance direction (effect position PB2) of the rotation effect portion 403b across the main body guide portion 411, and is arranged side by side with the main body guide portion 411 in the width direction of the main body portion 401. Has been placed. The main body side hooking portion 453 has a convex portion protruding from the main body portion 401 toward the front of the gaming machine, and the end of the spring member 451 is fixed by a screw or the like while being hooked on the convex portion. . In this case, the spring member 451 is rotatable along the front surface of the main body 401 with the convex portion of the main body side hooking portion 453 as an axis.

  The first link portion 402 has a bulging portion 454 that bulges toward the opposite side of the effect position PB2 in a direction intersecting (substantially orthogonal to) the first shaft portion 404 to the third shaft portion 406. The bulging portion 454 has a link side hooking portion 452. The link side hooking portion 452 has a convex portion protruding from the bulging portion 454 toward the front of the gaming machine, and the end of the spring member 451 is fixed by a screw or the like while being hooked on the convex portion. Yes. In this case, the spring member 451 is rotatable along the front surface of the bulging portion 454 with the convex portion of the link side hooking portion 452 as an axis.

  The bulging portion 454 bulges along the front surface of the main body portion 241 in the first link portion 402 from the first shaft portion 404 in a direction intersecting the first link portion 402 (width direction of the main body portion 401). Yes. The link side hooking portion 452 is disposed at the tip of the bulging portion 454, and the bulging dimension of the bulging portion 454 is substantially the same as the width dimension of the main body portion 401. That is, the separation distance between the first shaft portion 404 and the link side hooking portion 452 is substantially the same as the width dimension of the main body portion 401.

  The spring member 451 extends in the vertical direction along the front surface of the main body 401 on the side opposite to the direction of appearance of the rotation effect section 403b across the main body guide 411. Here, since the turning radius of the link side hooking portion 452 is as large as possible that is substantially the same as the width of the main body portion 401, the movement of the link side hooking portion 452 accompanying the turning of the first link portion 402. The direction is almost limited to the vertical direction.

  In addition, the fact that the turning radius of the link-side hooking portion 452 is made as large as possible is that the urging force of the spring member 451 is used as the turning force for turning the first link portion 402. It will also increase. Here, when the first shaft portion 404 is a fulcrum, the link side hooking portion 452 is a force point, and the third shaft portion 406 is an action point, the separation distance between the fulcrum and the action point is relative to the separation distance between the fulcrum and the action point. Since the ratio is increased as much as possible, the urging force of the spring member 451 can increase the acceleration at the start of rotation of the link portions 402 and 403 and the maximum speed as much as possible.

<Main body 401>
The second decoration device 233 includes a link transmission unit 462 that transmits the driving force of the link drive unit 442 to the second link unit 403 (second shaft unit 405). The link transmission unit 462 is mounted on the main body unit 401. ing. The link transmission unit 462 includes a link gear 491 that is fixed to the rotation shaft portion of the link drive unit 442. The rotation axis of the link gear 491 extends along the thickness direction of the main body 401 along the rotation shaft of the link driving unit 442 and is disposed in front of the main body 401. In this case, the rotation shaft portion of the link driving portion 442 protrudes from the main body portion 401 toward the front of the gaming machine, and the link gear 491 is fixed to the protruding portion.

  The second decoration device 233 includes an upper cover body 465 that covers the first shaft portion 404 and the link side hooking portion 452 from the front of the gaming machine at the upper portion of the main body portion 401, and a link gear 491 and a main body side at the lower portion of the main body portion 401. It has a lower cover body 466 that covers the hook portion 453 from the front of the gaming machine and an upper decorative body 467 attached to the front surface of the upper cover body 465.

  The second decoration device 233 has a reverse rotation stopper 469 that restricts the rotation of the second link unit 403 toward the opposite side of the effect position PB2 when the rotation effect part 403b is at the retracted position PB1. doing. The reverse rotation stopper 469 is a convex portion that protrudes from the lower cover body 466 toward the front of the gaming machine, and is disposed on the opposite side of the effect position PB2 across the second link portion 403. Here, in the second decoration device 233, when the rotation effect portion 403b is at the retracted position PB1, the second shaft portion 405 exists at the bottom dead center, and therefore, the second link portion 403 is applied by the biasing force of the spring member 451. However, there is a concern that it may rotate toward the side opposite to the effect position PB2. On the other hand, a straight line connecting the first shaft portion 404 and the second shaft portion 405 is formed when the side surface of the lower portion of the second link portion 403 opposite to the effect position PB2 is in contact with the reverse rotation stopper 469. The movement of the third shaft portion 406 to the opposite side of the effect position PB2 is restricted.

  In the second decoration device 233, in addition to the reverse rotation stopper 469, the rotation of the second link unit 403 toward the opposite side of the effect position PB2 when the rotation effect part 403b is at the retracted position PB1. The upper cover body 465 is also regulated. The upper cover body 465 has a portion that overlaps at least a part of the second link portion 403 in the thickness direction of the main body portion 401, and the side surface opposite to the effect position PB <b> 2 at the upper portion of the second link portion 403 is the upper portion. By contacting the cover body 465, the second link unit 403 is restricted from rotating in the reverse direction in a state where the rotation effect unit 403b is at the retracted position PB1. In this case, in the second link portion 403, the reverse rotation stopper 469 is hooked at the lower portion thereof, and the upper cover body 465 is hooked at the upper portion thereof.

  The reverse rotation stopper 269 corresponds to a first stopper that abuts a portion between the third shaft portion 406 and the first shaft portion 404 in the link body 403a of the second link portion 403, and the upper cover body 465. This corresponds to a second stopper that abuts against a portion opposite to the second shaft portion 405 across the third shaft portion 406 in the link portion main body 403a. Further, the reverse rotation stopper 469 and the upper cover body 465 constitute reverse rotation restricting means.

<Second link unit 403>
The second decoration device 233 includes an effect driving unit 475 that is driven to rotate the rotation effect unit 403b. The effect driving unit 475 is a motor such as a stepping motor having a rotation shaft portion, and the rotation effect portion 403b can be rotated along with the rotation of the rotation shaft portion. The effect drive unit 475 is attached to the second link unit 403 in a state of projecting to the front side of the second link unit 403. The effect drive unit 475 can rotate in both forward and reverse directions, and the rotation effect unit 403b rotates in accordance with the rotation direction of the effect drive unit 475.

  The link driving unit 442 and the effect driving unit 475 have different driving performance. Regarding the rated value of the driving torque, the link driving unit 442 is larger than the effect driving unit 475. Regarding the rated value of the driving speed (the rotational speed of the rotating shaft), the effect driving unit 475 is the link driving unit 442. Has been bigger than. In this case, the link driving unit 442 needs to exhibit a driving force necessary to rotate the link units 402 and 403, and therefore needs to have a sufficiently large driving torque. On the other hand, it is not necessary for the effect driving unit 475 to exert an excessively large driving torque as long as the rotation effect unit 403b can be rotated, and in order to increase the difference between the maximum speed and the minimum speed with respect to the rotation of the rotation effect unit 403b. It has the highest rated speed as much as possible. The link driving unit 442 corresponds to an arm driving unit.

  The effect driving unit 475 is disposed at a position near the second shaft portion 405 in the longitudinal direction of the second link portion 403. In this case, the effect driving unit 475 is opposite to the effect shaft portion 407 across the third shaft portion 406 in the longitudinal direction of the second link portion 403, that is, between the second shaft portion 405 and the third shaft portion 406. Arranged between. The effect drive unit 475 is covered with the link decorative body 403c from the front of the gaming machine, and cannot be viewed from the front of the gaming machine regardless of the rotational state of the second link unit 403. The effect drive unit 475 is arranged side by side along the longitudinal direction of the second link unit 403 on the effect drive unit 475 and the rotation effect unit 403b.

  The second decoration device 233 includes an effect transmission unit 476 that transmits the driving force of the effect drive unit 475 to the rotation effect unit 403b. As shown in FIG. 19, the effect transmission unit 476 is mounted on the second link unit 403. The link portion main body 403a of the second link portion 403 has a front case body 481 that forms the front surface thereof and a back case body 482 that forms the back surface thereof, and transmission of effects between the case bodies 481 and 482 is performed. The part 476 is accommodated. The front case body 481 and the back case body 482 are fixed to each other with screws or the like in a state where they are overlapped in the respective thickness directions.

  The case bodies 481 and 482 are made of a transparent synthetic resin material or the like, and the effect transmission unit 476 disposed between the case bodies 481 and 482 is visible through the case bodies 481 and 482. . In this case, in the link part main body 403a, since the internal structure including the effect transmission part 476 is visible, the maintenance work of the link part main body 403a is easy.

  The effect transmission unit 476 transmits the driving force to the effect gear 485 from the rotation gear 484 fixed to the rotation shaft portion of the effect drive portion 475, the effect gear 485 fixed to the effect shaft portion 407, and the rotation gear 484. And a plurality of transmission gears 486. The gears 484 to 486 are arranged along the plate surface of the link portion main body 403a with the respective rotation axes extending in the thickness direction of the second link portion 403. The rotation gear 484 is a drive gear that rotates together with the rotation shaft portion of the effect drive unit 475.

  The plurality of transmission gears 486 are arranged along the longitudinal direction of the link main body 403a between the rotation gear 484 and the effect gear 485. These transmission gears 486 include a gear meshed with the rotation gear 484 and a gear meshed with the effect gear 485, and each transmission gear 486 and the effect gear 485 rotate as the rotation gear 484 rotates. It is a driven gear.

  The plurality of transmission gears 486 include overlapping gears 486 a provided at positions overlapping the third shaft portion 406. The overlapping gear 486 a is provided in a state where its axis coincides with the axis of the third shaft portion 406, and can rotate relative to the third shaft portion 406. In this case, regardless of the state of the third shaft portion 406 (such as the angle of the second link portion 403 with respect to the first link portion 402), the overlap gear 486a rotates as the effect drive portion 475 is driven.

  The second link unit 403 is provided with an effect sensor 487 that detects the rotation angle of the rotation effect unit 403b with respect to the link body 403a. The effect gear 485 has a detected portion 487a that is to be detected by the effect sensor 487, and the effect sensor 487 can detect that the detected portion 487a is in a predetermined position. The effect sensor 487 is disposed on the back side of the effect gear 485, and the detected portion 487a is a convex portion protruding from the effect gear 485 in the radial direction. The effect sensor 487 can detect the angle of the rotation effect unit 403b in a state where the longitudinal direction of the rotation effect unit 403b overlaps the longitudinal direction of the link unit main body 403a as a zero angle. When the rotation effect unit 403b is at a zero angle, the longitudinal direction thereof coincides with the arrangement direction of the second shaft portion 405 and the third shaft portion 406.

<Operation of Rotation Effect Unit 403b>
In the second decoration device 233, the effect drive unit 475 is driven in accordance with the drive of the link drive unit 442, so that the rotation effect unit 403b moves toward the effect position PB2. Here, the relationship between the rotation of the link units 402 and 403 and the rotation of the rotation effect unit 403b will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 18A, when the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state, the rotation effect unit 403b extends in the vertical direction along the main body 401 at the retracted position PB1. In this case, the rotation effect part 403b is at a zero angle with respect to the link part main body 403a, and almost entirely overlaps the main body part 401, the first link part 402, and the like in the front-rear direction. In the rotation effect unit 403b at the zero angle, one end of the rotation effect unit 403b is the upper end, the other end is the lower end, and the upper end protrudes higher than the link body 403a. In this state, the first shaft portion 404 is disposed at a position overlapping the front and rear. Further, the lower end portion is disposed at a position overlapping the third shaft portion 406 in the front-rear direction.

  The second decoration device 233 shifts to the effect state when both the link drive unit 442 and the effect drive unit 475 are driven. In this case, the link drive unit 442 drives the rotation effect unit 403b in a direction (forward rotation) to move to the effect position PB2, and the effect drive unit 475 places the upper end of the rotation effect unit 403b on the effect position PB2 side (first decoration). Drive in the direction (forward rotation) to be moved to the device 232 side.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, in the second link unit 403, the upper end portion (the effect shaft unit 407) of the link unit main body 403 a is moved to the effect position when the link drive unit 442 and the effect drive unit 475 start to drive. While moving toward the PB2 side, the upper end portion of the rotation effect portion 403b moves toward the effect position PB2 side. In this case, a force (rotational force of the rotation effect unit 403b) that moves the upper end portion of the rotation effect unit 403b toward the effect position PB2 is applied to the effect shaft unit 407, and the rotational speed of the effect shaft unit 407 is moved by the rotation force ( The rotation speed of the link body 403a is increased.

  The effect driving unit 475 rotates the rotation effect unit 403b with respect to the link body 403a until the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the effect position PB2. In this case, the rotation shaft portion of the link drive unit 442 rotates by 480 degrees, whereas the rotation shaft portion of the effect drive unit 475 rotates by 360 degrees.

  As shown in FIG. 18C, the effect driving unit 475 can rotate the rotation effect unit 403b by continuously driving even after the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the effect position PB2. Yes. In this case, the rotation effect unit 403b appears vigorously in front of the display screen 75a while rotating, and the rotation effect unit 403b continues to rotate, so that the effect of the rotation effect unit 403b can be enhanced.

<Link transmission unit 462>
Next, the configuration of the link transmission unit 462 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the main body 401. FIG. 20 is a view of the main body 401 viewed from the back side.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the main body 401 on which the link transmission unit 462 is mounted has a front case body 488 that forms the front surface thereof and a back case body 489 that forms the back surface thereof. 462 is disposed between the case bodies 488 and 489 or on the front side of the front case body 488. The front case body 488 and the back case body 489 are fixed to each other with screws or the like in a state where they are overlapped in the respective thickness directions.

  The case bodies 488 and 489 are formed of a transparent synthetic resin material or the like, and the link transmission portion 462 and the like disposed between the case bodies 488 and 489 can be visually recognized through the case bodies 488 and 489. Yes. In this case, since the internal structure of the main body 401 including the case bodies 488 and 489 is visible, the maintenance work of the main body 401 is facilitated.

  In addition to the link gear 491, the link transmission unit 462 includes a pinion gear 492 that rotates in conjunction with the link gear 491, a rack 493 that performs linear motion in conjunction with the rotational motion of the pinion gear 492, and the pinion from the link gear 491. Transmission gears 494a and 494b that transmit driving force to the gear 492 are provided. The link gear 491, the pinion gear 492, and the transmission gears 494 a and 494 b are arranged along the plate surface of the main body 401 with the respective rotation axes extending in the thickness direction of the main body 401. The rack 493 is a long plate material extending along the plate surface of the main body 401, and has a plurality of teeth arranged along the long side.

  In the link transmission portion 462, the link gear 491 is disposed on the front side of the front case body 488, while the pinion gear 492 and the rack 493 are accommodated between the front case body 488 and the rear case body 489. . Here, the transmission gear 494a is disposed on the front side of the front case body 488 and meshes with the link gear 491, and the transmission gear 494b is disposed between the front case body 488 and the rear case body 489, and the pinion gear 492 is engaged. The transmission gears 494a and 494b are connected to each other in a state where the respective axes coincide with each other, and the connecting portion passes through the front case body 488.

  The link gear 491 is a drive gear that rotates together with the rotation shaft portion of the link drive unit 442, and the pinion gear 492 and the transmission gears 494a and 494b are driven gears that rotate as the link gear 491 rotates. . The rack 493 is a driven rack that moves linearly as the pinion gear 492 rotates.

  The rack 493 is arranged in a direction extending along the longitudinal direction of the main body guide portion 411 and is a moving member that moves along the main body guide portion 411. In this case, the rack 493 is disposed on the back side of the main body guide portion 411 with the front case body 488 of the main body portion 401 interposed therebetween. The main body 401 has a guide groove (not shown) for guiding the moving direction of the rack 493, and the rack 493 is provided in a state of entering the guide groove. The guide grooves are provided in the front case body 488 and the back case body 489 of the main body 401, and are formed by recessing the inner side surfaces of the front case body 488 and the back case body 489. The guide groove extends along the main body guide portion 411.

  A second shaft portion 405 is connected to the rack 493 via a main body guide portion 411, and the second shaft portion 405 moves along the main body guide portion 411 as the rack 493 slides. The main body guide portion 411 is formed by a main body long hole 411a formed in the front case body 488 of the main body portion 401, and the second shaft portion 405 is formed in the front case body 488 without being detached from the main body long hole 411a. It is attached.

  The movable range of the second shaft portion 405 is limited in the vertical direction by the main body elongated hole 411a. Of the inner peripheral surface of the main body long hole 411a, the ceiling surface 411b facing downward restricts the second shaft portion 405 that is in contact from below to move upward from the uppermost position HB1, and rises. The stopper 412 is the ceiling surface 411b. The bottom surface 411c facing upward is a lowering restricting portion that restricts the second shaft portion 405 abutted from above from moving downward from the lowest position LB1. As described above, since the second shaft portion 405 is located at or near the bottom dead center when it is at the lowest position LB1, it is below the lowest position LB1 even if the lowering is not restricted by the bottom surface 411c. It is also assumed that there is no movement.

  The main body long hole 411a penetrates the front case body 488 in the front-rear direction, and the rack 493 is formed with a hook hole 495 into which the second shaft portion 405 enters from the front. The hook hole 495 is a long hole extending along the moving direction of the rack 493 and penetrates the rack 493 in the front-rear direction. The second shaft portion 405 can move together with the rack 493 while being hooked on the rack 493 inside the main body portion 401.

  The second shaft portion 405 is inserted through the main body long hole 411a and the hooking hole 495, and is provided with the main body guide portion 411 and the rack 493 sandwiched from the front and rear. In this case, the second shaft portion 405 is hooked from the front in the state where it is hooked on the front surface of the front case body 488 and the front shaft piece 405a inserted into the main body long hole 411a from the front and the rear surface of the rack 493. A rear shaft piece 405b inserted into the hole 495 is provided, and the front shaft piece 405a and the rear shaft piece 405b are fixed by screws or the like.

  The hook hole 495 is disposed at a position overlapping with the main body guide portion 411 (main body long hole 411a) in the front-rear direction in the width direction of the main body portion 401. The width dimension of the hook hole 495 is substantially the same as the width dimension of the main body elongated hole 411a. While the length dimension of the hook hole 495 is smaller than the length dimension of the main body elongated hole 411a, it is larger than the vertical dimension of the entering portion of the second shaft portion 405. For this reason, the second shaft portion 405 can move up and down relatively with respect to the hooking hole 495 while being inserted into the hooking hole 495.

  In the rack 493, the side surface extending in the vertical direction of the inner peripheral surface of the hooking hole 495 is a limiting means for limiting the moving direction of the second shaft portion 405 in the vertical direction. The ceiling surface 495a facing downward of the inner peripheral surface of the hooking hole 495 is a downward pushing portion that pushes the second shaft portion 405 downward when the rack 493 moves downward. The facing bottom surface 495b is an upward pushing portion that pushes the second shaft portion 405 upward when the rack 493 moves upward.

  When the second shaft portion 405 moves upward, the rotation effect portion 403b moves toward the effect position PB2. Therefore, the bottom surface 495b moves in the direction in which the rotation effect portion 403b moves to the effect position PB2. The ceiling surface 495a corresponds to a second pressing portion that presses the second shaft portion 405 in a direction in which the rotation effect portion 403b returns to the retracted position PB1. The ceiling surface 495a and the bottom surface 495b are opposed to each other with the second shaft portion 405 interposed therebetween, and the separation distance between the ceiling surface 495a and the bottom surface 495b is larger than the height dimension of the second shaft portion 405. For this reason, the 2nd axial part 405 will not be in the state which is simultaneously contacting both the ceiling surface 495a and the bottom face 495b.

  The rack 493 is movable in a range in which at least a part of the hooking hole 495 overlaps with the main body long hole 411a in the front-rear direction. When the rack 493 is at the highest position HB2 which is the highest position in the movable range (see FIG. 22B), the rack 493 is placed between the bottom surface 495b of the hook hole 495 and the ceiling surface 411b of the main body long hole 411a. The biaxial portion 405 is sandwiched. In this case, the second shaft portion 405 pushed up by the rack 493 is held at the uppermost position HB1 by being hooked on the ceiling surface 411b of the main body long hole 411a, and the rack 493 is held at the uppermost position HB2. The second shaft portion 405 regulates the upward movement.

  Incidentally, since the rack 493 can slide relative to the second shaft portion 405, for example, even when the second shaft portion 405 is at the uppermost position HB1, the rack 493 is hooked from the uppermost position HB2 of the rack 493. It is possible to move downward to a position where the ceiling surface 495 a of the hole 495 contacts the second shaft portion 405.

  On the other hand, when the rack 493 is in the lowest position LB2, which is the lowest position in the movable range (see FIG. 18A), the bottom surface 495b of the hook hole 495 is substantially the same as the bottom surface 411c of the main body long hole 411a. In the height position. In this case, the second shaft portion 405 is placed on the bottom surface 495b of the hooking hole 495, and unlike the case where the second shaft portion 405 is spaced upward from the bottom surface 495b, the rack 493 is positioned upward. The bottom surface 495b of the hooking hole 495 immediately pushes up the second shaft portion 405 by moving toward the. Further, this state can also be referred to as a state in which the rack 493 has moved to the lowest position LB2 by the second shaft portion 405 pushing down the bottom surface 495b of the hooking hole 495.

  A rack sensor 497 for detecting that the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2 is attached to the main body 401. The rack 493 has a detected portion 498 that is a detection target of the rack sensor 497. The rack sensor 497 detects that the detected portion 498 is at a predetermined position, so that the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2. Detect that there is. The rack sensor 497 is fixed to the front case body 488 of the main body 401 with screws or the like in a state of being arranged on the front side of the rack 493, and the detected part 498 is forward from the rack 493 toward the rack sensor 497. It is a protruding convex part.

  The detected portion 498 is disposed below the hook hole 495 in the rack 493, and is detected by the rack sensor 497 when the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2, and the rack 493 has moved upward from the lowest position LB2. If not detected. The detected portion 498 protrudes to the front surface side of the main body 401 through the main body long hole 411 a, and the protruding portion is a portion detected by the rack sensor 497. The front case body 488 of the main body 401 is formed with a slit extending downward from the main body long hole 411a. When the rack 493 moves toward the lowest position LB2, the detected portion 498 It is detected by the rack sensor 497 by moving through the slit to a position below the bottom surface 411c of the long hole 411a.

  The detected portion 498 extends along the longitudinal direction (vertical direction) of the rack 493 and has a predetermined length dimension in the vertical direction. This length dimension is larger than the length dimension of the detection range of the rack sensor 497 in the vertical direction. In this case, the rack sensor 497 can detect the detected portion 498 not only when the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2 but also when the rack 493 is slightly higher than the lowest position LB2. . For example, in a configuration in which the length dimension of the detected portion 498 is extremely small in the vertical direction, the detected portion 498 exists at a position outside the detection range of the rack sensor 497 even though the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2. As a result, there is a concern that the rack sensor 497 cannot detect the detected portion 498.

<Lock mechanism of second decoration device 233>
In the second decoration device 233, when the rotation effect unit 403b is at the retracted position PB1, the first link unit 402 and the second link unit 403 are rotated in the direction in which the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the effect position PB2. A retraction lock mechanism for restricting the movement. As described above, in the second decoration device 233, since the rack 493 can move relative to the second shaft portion 405, when the rotation effect portion 403b is at the retracted position PB1, While the second shaft portion 405 is at the lowest position LB1, the rack 493 is not necessarily at the lowest position LB2. The retraction lock mechanism utilizes this fact to restrict the movement of the second shaft portion 405 as a locked state when the second shaft portion 405 is at the lowermost position LB1 and the rack 493 is at the lowermost position LB2. If the rack 493 is not in the lowest position LB2 even if the second shaft part 405 is in the lowest position LB1, the restriction of the second shaft part 405 is released as the unlocked state.

  Here, the retract lock mechanism will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 21A and 21B are diagrams showing the internal structure of the main body 401. FIG. 21A shows a case where the rack 493 is in the lowest position LB2, and FIG. 21B shows a case where the rack 493 is in the unlocking position LB3. In FIG. 21, the height position of the lower end of the rack 493 is shown as an unlock position LB3.

  As shown in FIG. 20, the first link portion 402 includes a long plate-shaped arm member 402 a that forms a main portion thereof, and a bulging member 402 b that forms a bulging portion 454. The bulging member 402b is attached to the end of the arm member 402a and extends in a direction intersecting with the arm member 402a. The intersecting angle is, for example, 90 degrees. The arm member 402a and the bulging member 402b are fixed in a state of being overlapped in the thickness direction of the arm member 402a, and in the first link portion 402, the portion where the arm member 402a and the bulging member 402b overlap. The 1st axial part 404 is arrange | positioned. The bulging member 402b has a convex portion projecting toward the main body portion 401, and a first shaft portion 404 is formed by the convex portion.

  The main body 401 has a rotation restricting member 511 that restricts the rotation of the first link portion 402 by being hooked on the rack 493, and a connecting member 512 that connects the rotation restricting member 511 to the bulging member 402b. doing. The rotation restricting member 511 and the connecting member 512 are both housed between the front case body 488 and the back case body 489. Note that the rotation restricting member 511 corresponds to a rotating body that rotates as the first link unit 402 rotates.

  The rotation restricting member 511 is disposed at a position overlapping the pinion gear 492 in the thickness direction of the main body 401 and overlapping at least a part of the rack 493 regardless of the position of the rack 493 that linearly moves. It can be rotated about the part 513 (see FIG. 21) as an axis. The rotation restricting member 511 is disposed on the back side of the rack 493 and is separated from the rack 493 toward the back case body 489. In this case, the rotation restricting member 511 is in a state of entering between the back case body 489 and the rack 493.

  The restricting shaft portion 513 connects the turning restricting member 511 to the rear case body 489 so as to be rotatable, and the axis of the restricting shaft portion 513 extends along the thickness direction of the main body portion 401. The restriction shaft portion 513 is a convex portion that protrudes from the back case body 489 toward the rotation restriction member 511, and is fixed to the rotation restriction member 511 in a state where the restriction shaft portion 513 enters the recess 513 a formed in the rotation restriction member 511. Has been. The rotation restricting member 511 rotates along the plate surface of the main body 401 with the restricting shaft portion 513 as an axis. The restriction shaft portion 513 is disposed at a position overlapping the main body guide portion 411 and the rack 493 in the thickness direction of the main body portion 401.

  The rotation restricting member 511 is formed in a plate shape as a whole and extends along the inner surface of the back case body 489. The rotation restricting member 511 includes a restricting hook portion 515 that can be hooked on the rack 493 and a restricting connection portion 516 connected to the connecting member 512. The restriction hooking part 515 and the restriction connecting part 516 are arranged along the plate surface of the rotation restricting member 511 with respect to the restriction shaft part 513, and both are arranged at positions separated from the restriction shaft part 513. The restriction hooking part 515 and the restriction connection part 516 are spaced apart from the restriction shaft part 513 in different directions.

  The straight line connecting the restriction hooking part 515 and the restriction shaft part 513 intersects with the straight line connecting the restriction connection part 516 and the restriction shaft part 513, and the intersection angle is set to 90 degrees, for example. The rotation restricting member 511 is formed in a sector shape as a whole, a restricting connection portion 516 is disposed on one end side of the arc, and a restricting hook portion 515 is disposed on the other end side.

  In the rotation restricting member 511, the restricting hook portion 515 is disposed at a position above the restricting shaft portion 513, and the restricting connection portion 516 is disposed at a side position of the restricting shaft portion 513. Here, the restriction hooking portion 515 moves on the curve along the width direction of the main body portion 401 as the rotation restriction member 511 rotates. For example, when the rotation effect portion 403b is at the retracted position PB1, the restriction hooking portion 515 is at a position farthest from the connecting member 512 in the width direction of the main body portion 401 (position close to the effect position PB2). When the part 403b is in the effect position PB2, the position is closest to the connecting member 512.

  On the other hand, the regulation connecting portion 516 moves on the curve along the vertical direction as the rotation regulation member 511 rotates. For example, the regulation connecting portion 516 is at the highest position when the rotation effect portion 403b is at the retracted position PB1, and is at the lowest position when the rotation effect portion 403b is at the effect position PB2.

  The connecting member 512 is a vertically long plate extending in the vertical direction along the rack 493. The connecting members 512 are arranged side by side on the rack 493 in the width direction of the main body 401. In the connecting member 512, the upper end portion thereof is rotatably connected to the bulging member 402b, and the lower end portion thereof is rotatably connected to the rotation restricting member 511. The lower end portion of the connecting member 512 is connected to the restricting connection portion 516 in a state where the lower end portion is overlapped with the front surface of the rotation restricting member 511. In this case, the rotation restricting member 511 is in a state of entering between the back case body 489 and the connecting member 512.

  Note that, in the connection portion between the rotation restricting member 511 and the connecting member 512, the restricting connecting portion 516 of the turn restricting member 511 is a recess recessed toward the opposite side to the connecting member 512, and is formed in the connecting member 512. The regulation connecting portion 516 is fixed to the connecting member 512 in a state where the projected portion 516 a enters the regulation connecting portion 516 (concave portion).

  Moreover, in the connection part of the connection member 512 and the swelling member 402b, the upper end part of the connection member 512 is connected to the swelling member 402b in the state arrange | positioned at the back side of the swelling member 402b. The bulging member 402 b has a bulging connection portion 517 that passes through the front case body 488 and protrudes toward the coupling member 512, and the bulging connection portion 517 is a recess formed in the coupling member 512 ( It is fixed to the connecting member 512 in a state of entering (not shown). The bulging connection portion 517 is disposed on the back side of the link side hooking portion 452 in the bulging portion 454. In this case, the bulging connection portion 517 is disposed at a position separated from the first shaft portion 404 in a direction intersecting the alignment direction of the first shaft portion 404 and the third shaft portion 406, and the first link portion. It moves up and down with the rotation of 402.

  The front case body 488 is formed with a connection hole 518 through which the bulging connection portion 517 is inserted. The connection hole 518 is a long hole with a curved shape extending in the vertical direction along the locus drawn by the bulging connection portion 517 as the first link portion 402 rotates. The restriction connecting portion 516 of the rotation restricting member 511 is disposed below the bulging connection portion 517, and the movement curves of the restriction connecting portion 516 and the bulging connection portion 517 are substantially the same.

  In the first link portion 402, the bulging connection portion 517 corresponds to a link displacement portion that is displaced as the first link portion 402 rotates. Further, in the rotation restricting member 511, the restricting connecting portion 516 corresponds to a turning displacement portion that is displaced as the turning restricting member 511 is turned, and the restricting shaft portion 513 corresponds to the turning shaft portion.

  In the rotation restricting member 511, the restricting hooking portion 515 protrudes toward the back surface of the rack 493. The rack 493 has a rack receiving portion 521 to which the restriction hooking portion 515 can be hooked. The rack receiving portion 521 protrudes rearward from the rack 493 toward the rotation restricting member 511. The restriction hooking portion 515 corresponds to a first displacement portion that is displaced with the rotation of the first link portion 402, and the rack receiving portion 521 is displaced with the rotation of the second link portion 403. It corresponds to the displacement part.

  The rack receiving portion 521 has a receiving surface 521a on which the restriction hooking portion 515 is hooked when the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2, as a side surface extending in the thickness direction of the rack 493. The receiving surface 521a is a surface facing the side opposite to the connecting member 512 (the effect position PB2 side) on the side surface of the rack receiving portion 521.

  As shown in FIG. 21A, when the rack 493 is in the lowest position LB2, the rack receiving portion 521 is in a state where it enters between the restriction hooking portion 515 and the connecting member 512 in the width direction of the main body portion 401. The receiving surface 521a is arranged side by side on the restriction hooking portion 515 along the movement locus of the restriction hooking portion 515. The receiving surface 521a extends along the up-down direction, and is substantially orthogonal to the moving direction of the restriction hooking portion 515. In this case, since the rotation of the rotation restricting member 511 is prevented by the contact of the restriction hooking portion 515 with the receiving surface 521a, the first link portion 402 connected to the rotation restricting member 511 via the connecting member 512. Is also prevented.

  The receiving surface 521a moves to a position higher than the restriction hooking portion 515 when the rack 493 moves upward. As shown in FIG. 21B, when the rack 493 is in the unlocking position LB3 that is higher than the lowest position LB2, the restriction hooking portion 515 is moved to the rack receiving portion as the rotation restriction member 511 rotates. Even if it moves to the side toward the 521 side, the restriction hooking portion 515 is not caught on the receiving surface 521a. When the lowest position LB2 and the unlock position LB3 are separated by the size of the gap between the hook hole 495 and the second shaft portion 405 in the vertical direction, and the rack 493 is at the unlock position LB3. However, the second shaft portion 405 is at the lowest position LB1.

  Further, in the detected portion 498 of the rack 493, the length in the vertical direction is substantially the same as the separation distance between the lowest position LB2 and the lock release position LB3. Here, the detected portion 498 is within the detection range of the rack sensor 497 regardless of whether the rack 493 is in the lowest position LB2 or the unlock position LB3. That is, it is detected by the rack sensor 497. For this reason, the rack sensor 497 enters a state in which the detected portion 498 is not detected when the rack 493 moves to a position higher than the unlock position LB3.

  On the side surface of the rack receiving portion 521, a receiving surface 521a extends downward from the upper end of the rack receiving portion 521, and the lower end of the receiving surface 521a is restricted when the rack 493 moves downward. A guide surface 521b that guides the connecting portion 516 toward the receiving surface 521a is connected. The guide surface 521b linearly extends obliquely downward from the lower end of the receiving surface 521a toward the connecting member 512 side. In this case, the width dimension of the rack receiving portion 521 is gradually reduced as it approaches the lower end as a whole. Note that the guide surface 521b may be curved so as to bulge outward from the rack receiving portion 521 in the width direction of the rack 493, or may be curved so as to be recessed inward.

  The rack receiving portion 521 moves from a position higher than the restricting connecting portion 516 to a position lying side by side with the restricting connecting portion 516 as the rack 493 moves toward the unlocking position LB3 and the lowest position LB2. . In this case, in the width direction of the rack 493, as long as the regulation connecting portion 516 enters the side opposite to the connecting member 512 across the rack receiving portion 521, then the regulation connecting portion 516 moves along the guide surface 521 b. By doing so, it will be guided to the receiving surface 521a.

  In the second decoration device 233, a lock mechanism is configured including the first link portion 402, the rack 493, the rotation restricting member 511, and the connecting member 512. The lock mechanism is in a locked state when the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2, and is in an unlocked state when the rack 493 is higher than the unlock position LB3. In this case, the lowest position LB2 of the rack 493 corresponds to the lock position.

<Operation of Second Decoration Device 233>
Next, an operation mode of the second decoration device 233 will be described with reference to FIGS. 18, 21, and 22. FIG. 22 is an operation diagram when the second decoration device 233 shifts from the effect state to the retracted state. In the enlarged view of FIG. 22, the positional relationship between the second shaft portion 405 and the hooking hole 495 is shown.

<Appearance of rotation production unit 403b>
First, in the second decoration device 233, a case where the rotation effect unit 403b moves from the retracted position PB1 toward the effect position PB2 will be described.

  As shown in FIGS. 18A and 21A, when the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state (the rotation effect unit 403b is in the retracted position PB1) and the rack 493 is in the lowest position LB2, The lock mechanism is in a locked state, and the rotation effect unit 403b is restricted from moving toward the effect position PB2. In this case, the rotation restricting member 511 is hooked on the rack 493, so that the link portions 402 and 403 are prevented from rotating due to the urging force of the spring member 451, and the rotation effect portion 403b is displayed on the display screen 75a. It does not appear in front of.

  Here, as the link drive unit 442 is driven, only the rack 493 moves from the lowest position LB2 to the lock release position LB3 in a state where the second shaft portion 405 does not move from the lowest position LB1. Since the unlocking and the rotation of the link parts 402 and 403 are performed sequentially, not simultaneously, the link parts 402 and 403 start to rotate rapidly after the unlocking. In this case, since the movement of the rotation effect unit 403b from the retreat position PB1 toward the effect position PB2 is suddenly started, it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect by causing the rotation effect unit 403b to appear in front of the display screen 75a.

  On the other hand, for example, in the configuration in which the second shaft portion 405 is also pushed up when the rack 493 moves from the lowest position LB2 to the lock release position LB3, the link portions 402 and 403 are moved while releasing the lock. The rotation will start slowly.

  The second decoration device 233 shifts to the effect state when the link driving unit 442 is driven in the normal rotation. Here, when the link unit 402 starts to be driven, as shown in FIG. 21B, the rack 493 moves from the lowest position LB2 to the lock release position LB3, so that the rotation restricting member 511 is hooked on the rack 493. Is released, and the lock mechanism shifts to the unlocked state.

  When the lock mechanism shifts to the unlocked state, the urging force of the spring member 451 is applied to the first link portion 402 in the direction in which the rotation effect portion 403b moves to the effect position PB2. Further, the rack 493 moves upward beyond the unlocking position LB3, thereby pushing up the second shaft portion 405 with the second shaft portion 405 hooked on the bottom surface 495b of the hooking hole 495, and the second shaft portion 405 is lowered to the lowest position LB1. Move upward from Accordingly, the rotation of the first link unit 402 and the second link unit 403 is started by both the biasing force of the spring member 451 and the driving force of the link driving unit 442.

  Here, the rack sensor 497 detects the detected portion 498 of the rack 493 until the rack 493 reaches the unlocking position LB3 from the lowest position LB2, and the rack 493 moves above the unlocking position LB3. In this case, the detected portion 498 is not detected. For this reason, the rack sensor 497 can detect that the rack 493 has moved upward beyond the unlock position LB3 (the lock mechanism has shifted to the unlocked state), and the rack sensor 497 releases the lock. When is detected, the effect driving unit 475 is driven.

  As shown in FIG. 18B, when the effect driving unit 475 is driven and the rotation effect unit 403 b rotates in a direction that accelerates the rotation of the second link unit 403, the biasing force of the spring member 451 and Since the rotational force of the rotation effect unit 403b is added to the driving force of the link drive unit 442, for example, compared to a configuration in which the rotation effect unit 403b does not rotate, the moving speed of the rotation effect unit 403b (the rotation speed of the link units 402 and 403). ) Becomes larger.

  Here, after the link driving unit 442 starts driving, the effect driving unit 475 starts driving after unlocking is detected by the rack sensor 497, thereby preventing the rotation effect unit 403b from rotating at the retracted position PB1. it can. On the back side of the game board 60a, a space is assumed that the rotation effect unit 403b is accommodated at a zero angle. For example, when the rotation effect unit 403b rotates at the retracted position PB1, the rotation effect unit 403b. In this case, there is a concern that the lower end portion that moves toward the side opposite to the effect position PB2 may come into contact with a device or the like disposed on the side opposite to the central opening 72 with the second decoration device 233 interposed therebetween. On the other hand, in this embodiment, since the rotation of the link portions 402 and 403 is started, the rotation effect portion 403b starts to rotate at the position moved from the retracted position PB1 toward the effect position PB2. It is avoided that the rendering unit 403b rotates and contacts other devices. Thereby, damage and deformation | transformation of the rotation production | presentation part 403b or another apparatus can be suppressed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 18C, when the rack 493 reaches the uppermost position HB2, the second shaft portion 405 pushed up by the rack 493 also reaches the uppermost position HB1, and the rotation effect part 403b rotates. However, it has moved to the production position PB2. In this case, the second shaft portion 405 is hooked on the ascending stopper 412 of the main body guide portion 411 (the ceiling surface 411b of the main body long hole 411a), so that the rotation of the link portions 402 and 403 is stopped. The movement of the unit 403b stops. When the rotation effect portion 403b is at the effect position PB2, the ceiling surface 495a of the hook hole 495 of the rack 493 is spaced upward from the second shaft portion 405.

  The link drive unit 442 stops driving when the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the effect position PB2. When the link drive unit 442 stops driving, the angle between the first link unit 402 and the main body unit 401 is reduced by the urging force of the spring member 451 (the direction in which the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the retracted position PB1). There is a concern that the first link unit 402 rotates. On the other hand, as described above, when the rotation effect unit 403b is at the effect position PB2, the intersection angle (link angle β) between the first link unit 402 and the second link unit 403 is smaller than 90 degrees. And the fact that the second shaft portion 405 is caught by the ascending stopper 412 prevents the first link portion 402 from rotating against the biasing force of the spring member 451. Therefore, even when the link drive unit 442 is stopped, the rotation effect unit 403b is held at the effect position PB2.

<Storage of rotation effect section 403b>
Next, a case where the rotation effect unit 403b returns from the effect position PB2 to the retracted position PB1 will be described.

  The second decoration device 233 shifts to the retracted state when the link driving unit 442 is driven in reverse rotation. When the link driving unit 442 starts to drive, the rack 493 moves downward from the uppermost position HB2, so that the ceiling surface 495a of the hook hole 495 of the rack 493 has the second axis as shown in FIG. The part 405 is caught from above. Then, the rack 493 moves downward with the second shaft portion 405 hooked, so that the second shaft portion 405 pulled down by the rack 493 is lower than the uppermost position HB1 as shown in FIG. It will move downward. In this case, the link portions 402 and 403 rotate against the urging force of the spring member 451 in the direction in which the rotation effect portion 403b moves to the retracted position PB1.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 18A, when the rack 493 passes through the unlocking position LB3 and reaches the lowest position LB2 by being lowered by the driving force of the link driving unit 442, the link driving unit 442 Stopped. Here, the detected part 498 of the rack 493 is detected by the rack sensor 497, thereby detecting that the rack 493 has reached the lowest position LB2.

  When the rack 493 has reached the lowest position LB2, the second shaft portion 405 has also reached the lowest position LB1, and accordingly, the rotation effect portion 403b has also reached the retracted position PB1. In this case, the lock mechanism of the second decoration device 233 is in a locked state by the restriction hooking portion 515 of the rotation restriction member 511 being hooked on the rack receiving portion 521 of the rack 493. As a result, the rotation of the link portions 402 and 403 is restricted against the biasing force of the spring member 451.

  When the effect drive unit 475 moves the rotation effect unit 403b to the retracted position PB1, the effect drive unit 475 rotates the effect of the rotation effect unit 403b for the effect in response to the link drive unit 442 starting driving in the reverse rotation. The rotation effect unit 403b is driven in a direction at a zero angle with respect to the link unit main body 403a of the second link unit 403. In this case, in the second decoration device 233, the link effect units 403b are rotated in the direction in which the rotation effect unit 403b is moved to the retracted position PB1, and the rotation effect unit 403b is rotated in a direction at a zero angle. Become. As a result, the rotation effect unit 403b reaches the retreat position PB1 in a state where the rotation effect unit 403b is at a zero angle with respect to the link unit main body 403a.

<Electrical wiring of second decoration device 233>
The second decoration device 233 has a plurality of light emitting units (not shown). In the second decoration device 233, the effect is enhanced by the light emitting unit emitting light in accordance with the movement of the rotation effect unit 403b. The light emitting unit includes a light emitting body such as an LED and a light emitting substrate on which a plurality of the light emitting bodies are mounted, and is provided in the second link unit 403. In the second link part 403, the front part of the rotation effect part 403b is formed as a light transmissive part by a light transmissive member, and the light emitting part is disposed on the back side of the light transmissive part. When the light emitting portion emits light, for example, a portion imitating a bone or a character is lit.

  Electrical wiring is connected to the light emitting unit, and power is supplied to the light emitting substrate from the power supply / launch control device 191 through the electrical wiring. The electrical wiring is laid inside the link portions 402 and 403 in a state that does not hinder the rotation of the link portions 402 and 403 and the deformation of the rotation effect portion 403b. In the first shaft portion 404 and the third shaft portion 406, wiring through holes are formed at positions overlapping the respective axis lines, and the electrical wiring is routed from the back side of the main body portion 401 to the wiring through holes of the first shaft portion 404. And enters the inside of the first link portion 402 through the wiring through hole of the third shaft portion 406 and enters the inside of the second link portion 403.

  In the second link unit 403, electrical wiring is also connected to the effect driving unit 475 and the effect sensor 487. Similar to the electrical wiring for the light emitting section, these electrical wirings are laid inside the first link part 402 through the wiring through holes of the first shaft part 404, while the wiring through holes of the third shaft part 406 are provided. Is drawn out to the front side of the link body 403a. Electric wiring is connected to the effect driving unit 475 on the front side of the link unit main body 403a, and the electric wiring is connected to the effect sensor 487 at a portion where the electric wiring is again drawn into the link unit main body 403a.

<Electrical configuration>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described based on the block diagram of FIG.

  An MPU 602 is mounted on a main control board 601 provided in the main controller 162. The MPU 602 is a ROM 603 storing various control programs executed by the MPU 602 and fixed value data, and a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the control program stored in the ROM 603. The RAM 604 is an element including an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, a data input / output circuit, various counter circuits as a random number generator, and the like. Note that a part of the functions of the MPU 602, for example, the function of the ROM 603 and the function of the RAM 604 may be included as another element.

  The MPU 602 is provided with an input port and an output port. Connected to the input side of the MPU 602 are a power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181, various detection sensors and the like provided in the main control device 162. In this case, the power failure monitoring board 605 is connected to the power source / emission control device 191, and power is supplied to the MPU 602 via the power failure monitoring board 605.

  Although not shown, the MPU 602 includes a winning detection sensor for the general winning opening 61, a winning detection sensor for the upper working opening 62, a winning detection sensor for the lower working opening 63, as a part of various detection sensors. A winning detection sensor for the variable winning device 64 and a winning detection sensor for the through gate 65 are connected, and the MPU 602 of the main control device 162 makes a winning determination (speech determination) to each winning portion. In addition, the MPU 602 executes a jackpot occurrence lottery based on winning at the upper working port 62 and the lower working port 63, and executes a support generating lottery based on the winning at the through gate 65.

  On the output side of the MPU 602, a power failure monitoring board 605, a payout control device 181 and a notification / effect control device 143 are connected. For example, a payout ball command is output to the payout control device 181 based on a winning determination result to the winning-corresponding winning portion. In this case, when outputting the prize ball command, the command information storage area of the ROM 603 is referred to. When the winning to the general winning opening 61 is specified, a winning ball command corresponding to the payout of 10 gaming balls is output, and when the winning to the variable winning device 64 is specified, 15 gaming balls are output. When the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the game is output and the winning to the upper working port 62 is specified, the winning ball command corresponding to the payout of the three game balls is output, and the winning to the lower operating port 63 is awarded. When specified, a prize ball command corresponding to the payout of four game balls is output.

  Various commands such as a change command, a change end command, an opening command, and an ending command are output to the notification / production control device 143. In this case, the command information storage area of the ROM 603 is referred to when these various commands are output. Each command is configured as information of a predetermined number of bytes, and various information is included as information of the predetermined number of bytes. In particular, in the change command as the command for game times, in addition to the information on the game result of each game time and the information on the change display time of each game time, the first decoration device 232 and the second command Information on whether or not to operate the decoration device 233 is included.

  Further, on the output side of the MPU 602, there is an accessory driving unit that drives the electric accessory 71 associated with the lower operating port 63, a variable ball driving unit that drives the opening / closing door of the variable winning device 64, and a main display unit 81. It is connected. Various driver circuits are provided on the main control board 601, and the MPU 602 executes drive control of various drive units and the like through the driver circuits.

  That is, in the opening / closing execution mode, the MPU 602 executes drive control of the variable winning driving unit in the variable winning device 64 so that the large winning opening of the variable winning device 64 is opened and closed. In addition, when the lower operating port 63 is in the open state winning (support winning), the MPU 602 executes drive control of the accessory driving unit of the electric accessory 71 so that the electric accessory 71 is opened and closed. . In each game round, the display control of the main display unit 81 is executed in the MPU 602.

  Furthermore, an external terminal plate 213 is connected to the output side of the MPU 602. The external terminal plate 213 is provided with a jackpot signal output terminal or the like as an output terminal for outputting a signal upon state transition. When the game result is a jackpot result, the MPU 602 can output a jackpot signal to the management control device on the game hall side through the jackpot signal output terminal. Specifically, in a normal time, a LOW level signal is output from the jackpot signal output terminal, and when a jackpot result is obtained, an HI level signal is output. The output mode of this signal may be reversed.

  The power failure monitoring board 605 relays between the main control board 601 and the power / fire control device 191, and monitors the DC stable voltage of 24 volts that is the maximum voltage output from the power / fire control device 191. The payout control device 181 performs payout control of prize balls and rental balls by the payout device 222 based on the prize ball command input from the main control device 162.

  The power supply / launch control device 191 is connected to, for example, a commercial power supply (external power supply) in a game hall or the like. Then, based on the external power supplied from the commercial power supply, necessary operating power is generated for each of the main control board 601, the payout control device 181 and the like, and the generated operating power is supplied through a predetermined power path. To do. The power supply / launch control device 191 is responsible for launch control of the game ball launch mechanism 110, and the game ball launch mechanism 110 is driven when predetermined launch conditions are met.

<About various counters>
Next, an electrical configuration for performing various lotteries in the MPU 602 of the main controller 162 will be described with reference to FIG.

  The MPU 602 uses various counter information in the game to perform jackpot occurrence lottery, display setting of the main display unit 81, setting of symbol display of the symbol display device 75, etc., specifically, as shown in FIG. As described above, the jackpot random number counter C1 used for the lottery generation of the jackpot, the jackpot type counter C2 used when determining the jackpot type, and the reach random number counter C3 used when the presence / absence of the reach and its type are distributed. The random number initial value counter CINI used for setting the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the variation type counter CS for determining the variation display time in the main display unit 81 and the symbol display device 75 are used. Furthermore, the counter C4 for an electric accessory used for the lottery for determining whether or not the electric accessory 71 of the lower working port 63 is in an electric utility open state is used.

  Each of the counters C1 to C4, CINI, and CS is a loop counter that adds 1 to the previous value each time it is updated, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. Each counter is updated at short time intervals, and the updated value is appropriately stored in a lottery counter buffer 631 set in a predetermined area of the RAM 604. Among these, in the lottery counter buffer 631, information corresponding to the big hit random number counter C1, the big hit type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 is acquired in the RAM 604 when a winning to the upper operating port 62 or the lower operating port 63 occurs. It is stored in a holding ball storage area 632 provided as information storage means.

  The holding ball storage area 632 includes a holding area RE including a holding area Ra for the first result display section and a holding area Rb for the second result display section, and an execution area AE. The reserved areas Ra and Rb include first areas Ra1 and Rb1, second areas Ra2 and Rb2, third areas Ra3 and Rb3, fourth areas Ra4 and Rb4, and are connected to the upper working port 62 or the lower working port 63. In accordance with the winning history, the numerical information of the jackpot random number counter C1, the jackpot type counter C2 and the reach random number counter C3 stored in the lottery counter buffer 631 is held information, and any one of the areas Ra1 to Ra4, Rb1 to Rb4 Stored in Note that the hold information corresponds to special information.

  In this case, in the first area Ra1, Rb1 to the fourth area Ra4, Rb4, when the winning to the upper working port 62 or the lower working port 63 is continuously generated a plurality of times, the first areas Ra1, Rb1 → first Each numerical information is stored in time series in the order of 2 area Ra2, Rb2 → third area Ra3, Rb3 → fourth area Ra4, Rb4. Thus, by providing each of the four areas Ra1 to Ra4 and Rb1 to Rb4, a maximum of four game balls winning histories to the upper working port 62 or the lower working port 63 are held and stored. It has become. The reserved ball storage area 632 is provided with a total number-of-holds storage area, and the total number-of-holds storage area specifies the number of the payout history stored in the upper operating port 62 or the lower operating port 63. To store information.

  Note that the number that can be reserved and stored is not limited to four, but may be any other number such as two, three, or five or more.

  The execution area AE is an area for moving the numerical information stored in the first areas Ra1 and Rb1 of the holding area RE when starting the variable display of the main display unit 81, and starting one game time At this time, determination of success or failure is performed based on various numerical information stored in the execution area AE.

  For details of each counter, the jackpot random number counter C1 is configured such that, for example, 1 is sequentially added within a range of 0 to 599, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. In particular, when the jackpot random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the random number initial value counter CINI at that time is read as the initial value of the jackpot random number counter C1. The random number initial value counter CINI is a loop counter similar to the jackpot random number counter C1 (value = 0 to 599). The big hit random number counter C <b> 1 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 62 or the lower operation port 63. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 62, and the second result display unit of the RAM 604 is stored in the timing when the game ball is won in the lower operation port 63. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  The value of the random number for winning the big hit is stored as a success / failure table (availability information group) in a success / failure table storage area 621 as a success / failure information group storage means in the ROM 603. Here, the contents of the success / failure table will be described. As the success / failure table, a success / failure table for the low probability mode (low probability success / failure information group) and a high probability mode's success / failure table (high probability success / failure information group) are set. That is, in the present pachinko machine 10, a low probability mode (low probability state) and a high probability mode (high probability state) are set as the lottery mode in the winning lottery means.

  In the gaming state in which the low-probability mode success / failure table is referred to at the time of the lottery, the number of random numbers (that is, the winning information) for winning the jackpot is two. On the other hand, in the gaming state in which the winning table for the high probability mode is referred to at the time of the lottery, there are 21 random number values for winning the jackpot. In this case, the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the low probability mode is included in the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode.

  If the winning probability of the high probability mode is higher than that of the low probability mode, the number and value of the random numbers to be won are arbitrary, and the jackpot random number to be a big win in the situation of the low probability mode The value group of the counter C1 may be configured to include only a part of the value group of the jackpot random number counter C1 that wins the jackpot in the situation of the high probability mode, or may not be included.

  In each lottery mode, the lottery result is a result other than the random number value which is a big win.

  Next, the jackpot type counter C2 will be described. The jackpot type counter C2 is configured so that 1 is added in order within a range of 0 to 29, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0. The big hit type counter C <b> 2 is periodically updated and stored in the reserved ball storage area 632 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the upper operation port 62 or the lower operation port 63. More specifically, the game result is stored in the first result display holding area Ra of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball is won in the upper operation port 62, and the second result display unit of the RAM 604 is stored in the timing when the game ball is won in the lower operation port 63. Stored in the reserved area Rb.

  Here, in the pachinko machine 10, (1) a winning / no-win lottery mode in the corresponding lottery means after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and (2) a support mode in the electric accessory 71 of the lower working port 63 after the opening / closing execution mode ends Different types of jackpot results are set by making a difference between the two conditions. As above-mentioned lottery mode, the low probability mode and the high probability mode are set as described above.

  As a support mode, the frequency with which the electric accessory 71 of the lower working port 63 is in an accepting state per unit time when compared in a situation where the game ball is continuously launched in the same manner with respect to the game area PE. The low-frequency support mode (the low-frequency support state or the low-frequency guide state) and the high-frequency support mode (the high-frequency support state or the high-frequency guide state) are set so that is relatively high.

  Specifically, in the low-frequency support mode and the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning the electrification accepting state in the electrification lottery using the electrification component counter C4 is the same (for example, both 4/5) However, in the high frequency support mode, the number of times that the electric accessory 71 is in the acceptance state when the electrification acceptance state is won is set more than in the low frequency support mode. The time is set longer. In this case, in the high-frequency support mode, when the electrification acceptance state is won and the electrification state of the electric accessory 71 occurs a plurality of times, the waiting period from the end of one acceptance state until the start of the next acceptance state The time is set to be shorter than a single acceptance time. Furthermore, in the high-frequency support mode, the minimum secured time is set shorter than the low-frequency support mode, after the first lot for the electric component is performed. Has been.

  As described above, in the high-frequency support mode, the probability of winning a prize to the lower operation port 63 is higher than in the low-frequency support mode. In other words, in the low frequency support mode, there is a higher probability of winning the upper operating port 62 than in the lower operating port 63, but in the high frequency support mode, winning in the lower operating port 63 rather than the upper operating port 62. Is likely to occur. When a prize is awarded to the lower operating port 63, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out. Therefore, in the high frequency support mode, the player plays a game while not reducing the number of possessed balls so much. be able to.

  Note that the configuration for increasing the frequency at which the high frequency support mode is in the state of accepting the power role per unit time as compared to the low frequency support mode is not limited to the above-described configuration, for example, lottery for the electric power item It is good also as a structure which raises the probability that it will be elected in the electric character acceptance state in. Furthermore, increase the number of times of switching to the acceptance state, lengthen the acceptance time, and ensure that the minimum is secured when the next lottery for the electric component is performed after the first lottery for the electric component is performed By shortening the time (that is, shortening the one-time variable display time in the accessory result display section) and increasing the winning probability, it is possible to reduce the time by applying any one condition or any combination of conditions. The advantage of the high frequency support mode over the frequency support mode may be increased.

  The game result distribution destination for the big hit type counter C2 is stored as a distribution table (distribution information group) in a distribution table storage area as a distribution information group storage means in the ROM 603. Then, a normal jackpot result (low probability special game result) and a probability variable jackpot result (high probability special game result) are set as the distribution destinations.

  The normal jackpot result is that the winning lottery mode becomes the low probability mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends, and the support frequency is high until the number of games reaches the end reference number (specifically, 100 times) after the support mode shifts. It is a jackpot result that becomes a mode. After the end reference count has elapsed, the mode shifts to the low frequency support mode.

  The probability variation jackpot result is a jackpot result in which the success / failure lottery mode becomes the high probability mode and the support mode becomes the high frequency support mode after the opening / closing execution mode ends. The high-frequency support mode continues until the lottery result in the winning or failing lottery becomes a big hit state winning and the operation shifts to the opening / closing execution mode.

  In the distribution table, “0 to 9” corresponds to the normal jackpot result, and “10 to 29” corresponds to the probability variation jackpot result, but this numerical distribution is arbitrary. In addition, the distribution destination of the jackpot result is not limited to the above two types. For example, in the opening / closing execution mode, a plurality of modes are set so that the expected value of the game ball is high and the opening / closing execution is performed. It is good also as a structure which increases the type of jackpot result rather than said two types by providing a difference in the mode transfer destination mode.

  For example, the reach random number counter C3 is incremented one by one within a range of 0 to 238, for example, and reaches a maximum value and then returns to 0. Here, in this pachinko machine 10, an expected effect is set as a kind of display effect in the symbol display device 75. The expected effect means that in the gaming machine in which the variable winning device 64 is in the opening / closing execution mode, in the gaming machine in which the stop result after the variable display is the result of giving, the variable display of the symbol (pattern) on the symbol display device 75 is started. This is a display state for making the player think that the change display state is likely to be the assignment correspondence result before the stop result is derived and displayed.

  The expectation effect includes two types of reach display and a notice display for expecting the occurrence of reach display and the generation of the corresponding result at the stage before the reach display occurs.

  In the reach display, a combination of reach symbols is displayed by displaying symbols for a part of a plurality of symbol sequences displayed on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75, and the remaining combinations in that state are displayed. A display state in which a variable display of symbols is displayed in the symbol row is included. In addition, in the state where the combination of reach symbols is displayed as described above, the variation of the symbols is displayed in the remaining symbol rows, and a predetermined character or the like is displayed as a moving image on the background screen. In addition, there are those that perform a reach effect by displaying a predetermined character or the like as a moving image on substantially the entire display screen after reducing or not displaying a combination of reach symbols.

  The notice display includes a plurality of symbol strings in a situation where symbols are variably displayed in all symbol strings after the symbol variable display is started on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75. In the situation where the symbols are variably displayed in the symbol row, a mode in which the character is displayed separately from the symbols on the symbol row is included. Moreover, what makes a background screen the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect, and what makes the symbol on a symbol row the predetermined aspect different from the previous aspect are also included. Such a notice display can occur in any game times when reach display is performed and when reach display is not performed, but the case where reach display is performed is higher than the case where reach display is not performed. It is set to occur with probability.

  The reach display is executed regardless of the value of the reach random number counter C3 in the game times that shift to the opening / closing execution mode. In the game times that do not shift to the open / close execution mode, the reach random number counter C3 acquired at a predetermined timing is referred to the reach table stored in the reach table storage area of the ROM 603 in response to the occurrence of the reach display. It is executed when On the other hand, the determination as to whether or not to perform the notice display is not performed in the main control device 162 but in the notification / production control device 143 or the display control device 170.

  The variation type counter CS is, for example, incremented by 1 within a range of 0 to 198, and returns to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The variation type counter CS is used when the MPU 602 determines the variation display time in the main display unit 81 and the symbol variation display time in the symbol display device 75. The variation type counter CS is updated once every time a normal process to be described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the normal process. Then, the buffer value of the variation type counter CS is acquired at the time of determining the variation pattern at the start of variation display in the main display unit 81 and at the time of symbol variation start by the symbol display device 75.

  The electric accessory counter C4 is, for example, configured to increment one by one within a range of 0 to 249 and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value. The counter C4 for the electric accessory is periodically updated and stored in the electric role reservation area 633 of the RAM 604 at the timing when the game ball wins the through gate 65. At a predetermined timing, a lottery is performed as to whether or not to control the electric accessory 71 of the lower working port 63 to the receiving state based on the stored value of the counter C4 for electric accessory. For example, if C3 = 0 to 199, the electric accessory 71 is controlled to be in an accepted state, and if C3 = 200 to 249, the electric accessory 71 is not controlled to be in an accepted state.

  As already described, the MPU 602 determines the variable display time in the main display unit 81 using at least the buffer value of the variable type counter CS, and the variable display time table storage area of the ROM 603 is used for the determination. . Further, the MPU 602 determines the stop result in the main display unit 81 using the value of the jackpot random number counter C1 and the value of the jackpot type counter C2 stored in the execution area AE. A result table storage area is used.

<Electric Configuration of Notification / Production Control Device 143 and Display Control Device 170>
With reference to the block diagram of FIG. 23 again, the electrical configuration of the notification / production control device 143 and the display control device 170 will be described.

  The notification / production control device 143 controls the lamp units 26 to 28 and the speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 based on various commands input from the main control device 162.

  The notification / production control device 143 has an audio lamp control board 651 on which an MPU 652 is mounted. The MPU 652 has a ROM 653 storing various control programs and fixed value data, and a control program stored in the ROM 653 is executed. A RAM 654 which is a memory for temporarily storing various data is incorporated.

  The MPU 652 is provided with an input port and an output port. The main control device 162 is connected to the input side of the MPU 652 and receives various commands from the main control device 162. To the output side of the MPU 652, various lamp units 26 to 28 and a speaker unit 29 provided on the front door frame 14 are connected and a display control device 170 is connected.

  The display control device 170 includes a display control board 701 on which an MPU 702 is mounted. The MPU 702 includes a program ROM that stores various control programs and fixed value data, and controls that are stored in the program ROM. A work RAM, which is a memory for temporarily storing various data when executing the program, is incorporated.

  The display control board 701 is connected to the symbol display device 75, the drive units 281 and 282 of the first decoration device 232, and the drive units 442 and 475 of the second decoration device 233. The MPU 702 of the display control device 170 performs display control of the symbol display device 75 and drive control of the drive units 281, 282, 442, and 475 based on the command input from the notification / production control device 143. In this case, the MPU 702 outputs a command signal to the drive units 281, 282, 442, and 475. The display control device 170 determines the symbol combination display time in the symbol display device 75 and finally the combination of symbols to be stopped and displayed on the basis of various commands input from the main control device 162. The presence or absence and the contents of reach production are determined.

  Further, the MPU 702 determines the timing at which the first decoration device 232 and the second decoration device 233 execute the special effects at each game time based on the change command input from the main control device 162. Specifically, with reference to the value of each special effect timing determination counter stored in the work RAM of the MPU 702, it is determined whether or not it is time to start any special effect.

  The special effects include a first special effect that operates the first decoration device 232 and a second special effect that operates the second decoration device 233. In the first special effect, the movement effect part 243b of the first decoration device 232 is moved from the retracted position PA1 to the effect position PA2, thereby causing the movement effect part 243b imitating the face of a dog to appear in front of the display screen 75a. It is. The second special effect appears by rotating the rotation effect unit 403b of the second decoration device 233 from the retracted position PB1 to the effect position PB2, while rotating the rotation effect unit 403b imitating the bone forward of the display screen 75a. Is.

  The first special effect and the second special effect are random during the game times whose execution timing is one. For example, any timing from the start of the variable display of each symbol on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 to the end of the variable display, or the reach display on the display screen 75a of the symbol display device 75 is started. For example, during the period from when the reach display is ended.

  The first special effect and the second special effect may be executed independently, or may be executed at overlapping timings. Depending on which of these special effects is executed, the degree of expectation resulting in any jackpot result in each game round differs. For example, the degree of expectation is set higher in the order of the second special effect → the first special effect → the first special effect and the second special effect. In this case, the degree of expectation is the lowest when the second special effect is performed, and the degree of expectation is the highest when both the first special effect and the second special effect are performed.

  Further, the display control device 170 is connected to the arm sensor 325 and the rack sensor 337 of the first decoration device 232, and the effect sensor 487 and the rack sensor 497 of the second decoration device 233, and these sensors 325, 337, Reference numerals 487 and 497 output detection signals to the MPU 702. The MPU 702 determines the state of the first decoration device 232 and sets command signals to the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 based on detection signals of the arm sensor 325 and the rack sensor 337. Further, based on detection signals from the production sensor 487 and the rack sensor 497, the state of the second decoration device 233 is determined, and command signals to the link drive unit 442 and the production drive unit 475 are set.

<Special production processing>
The MPU 702 of the display control apparatus 170 causes the first decoration device 232 and the second decoration device 233 to perform the first special effect and the second special effect, respectively, by executing the special effect process. Here, the effect process will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. FIG. 25 is a flowchart showing the effect process executed by the display control device 170, and FIG. 26 is a flowchart showing the operation process of the second decoration device 233. The MPU 702 repeatedly executes the special effect process at a predetermined cycle (for example, 2 msec).

  In FIG. 25, in step S101, it is determined whether or not the first special effect by the first decoration device 232 is executed. Here, based on the value of the special effect timing determination counter, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the first special effect. Note that it is determined in advance whether or not the first decoration device 232 is in the retracted state, and it is determined whether or not the first special effect is to be executed when in the retracted state. Incidentally, the determination as to whether or not the first decoration device 232 is in the retracted state includes determination as to whether or not the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state. This determination is based on the detection signal of the arm sensor 325. Do.

  When the first special effect is executed, the process proceeds to step S102, and the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are each started to be driven in a normal rotation. Here, by outputting a command signal to both the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282, the drive of these drive units 281 and 282 is started simultaneously. Thereby, in the 1st decoration device 232, the 1st link part 242 and the 2nd link part 243 rotate in the direction which the movement production | presentation part 243b moves to production position PA2. In this case, the intermediate arm 261 extends from the contracted state toward the extended state.

  In S103, it is determined whether or not the intermediate arm 261 has shifted to the folded state. Here, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle of the first drive unit 281 has reached the folding angle, and it is assumed that the intermediate arm 261 has shifted to the folding state when the folding angle has been reached. Sensors that detect the angle of the first arm part 264 with respect to the second arm part 265, the angle of the second arm part 265 with respect to the main body part 241, and the angle of the first arm part 264 with respect to the first link part 242 are provided. Then, based on the detection signal of this sensor, it may be determined whether or not the intermediate arm 261 has shifted to the broken state. For example, based on the detection signal of the sensor, it is determined whether or not the angle of the first arm portion 264 with respect to the second arm portion 265 is smaller than a predetermined angle. Judge that it has migrated.

  When the intermediate arm 261 shifts to the broken state, the process proceeds to step S104, and the drive of the first drive unit 281 is stopped. Thereby, for example, both the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 can save energy compared to a configuration in which the movement effect unit 243b is continuously driven until the effect position PA2 is reached. Here, the position of the movement effect unit 243b when the intermediate arm 261 shifts to the folded state corresponds to the drive stop position.

  In addition, even after the drive of the 1st drive part 281 is stopped, the intermediate | middle arm 261 transfers to an extended state in the state pulled by the 1st link part 242 rotated with the drive force of the 2nd drive part 282. In this case, since the first drive unit 281 also rotates in accordance with the rotation of the first arm unit 264 of the intermediate arm 261, the movement effect unit 243b moves to the effect position PA2, thereby rotating the rotation angle of the first drive unit 281. Will reach the production angle. Further, when the intermediate arm 261 has not shifted to the folded state, the special effect process is repeatedly executed until the intermediate arm 261 shifts.

  In step S105, it is determined whether or not the movement effect unit 243b has reached the effect position PA2. Here, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle of the second drive unit 282 has reached the effect angle, and when the effect angle is reached, it is assumed that the movement effect unit 243b has reached the effect position PA2. In this case, the second shaft portion 245 and the rack 333 are moved to the uppermost positions HA1 and HA2, respectively. If a sensor for detecting the angle of the first link part 242 with respect to the main body part 241 and the movement of the second shaft part 245 to the uppermost position HA1 is provided, the movement effect is based on the detection signal of this sensor. It may be determined whether or not the part 243b has moved to the effect position PA2. For example, based on the detection signal of the sensor, it is determined whether or not the second shaft portion 245 has moved to the uppermost position HA1, and if it has moved, it is determined that the movement effect portion 243b has reached the effect position PA2.

  When the movement effect part 243b has reached the effect position PA2, the process proceeds to step S106, and the driving of the second drive part 282 is stopped. In this case, the 1st decoration apparatus 232 will transfer to a production | presentation state, and is performing the 1st special production. If the movement effect unit 243b has not reached the effect position PA2, the special effect process is repeatedly executed until the effect position PA2 is reached.

  In step S107, it is determined whether or not to end the first special effect. Here, based on the value of the special effect timing determination counter, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the first special effect. Note that it is determined in advance whether or not the first decoration device 232 is in the effect state, and if it is in the effect state, it is determined whether or not to end the first special effect.

  When ending the first special effect, the process proceeds to step S108, and the second drive unit 282 is driven in reverse rotation. In this case, in the first decoration device 232, the rack 333 moves downward from the uppermost position HA2, and accordingly, the second shaft portion 245 also moves downward from the uppermost position HA1. Thereby, the 1st link part 242 and the 2nd link part 243 rotate in the direction which the movement production | presentation part 243b moves to retraction position PA1.

  In step S109, based on the detection signal of the rack sensor 337, it is determined whether or not the rack 333 has reached the lowest position LA2. Note that it may be determined whether or not the rack 333 has reached the lowest position based on the rotation angle (drive angle) of the rotation shaft portion of the second drive unit 282. For example, the second drive unit 282 uses the angle of the rotation shaft portion of the second drive unit 282 in the state before the movement effect unit 243b is moved to the effect position PA2 (the state where the rack 333 is at the lowest position LA2) as a reference angle. It is determined whether or not the driving angle has returned to the reference angle, and when it returns, it is determined that the rack 333 is at the lowest position LA2.

  When the rack 333 has reached the lowest position LA2, the drive of the second drive unit 282 is stopped in step S110, and the first drive unit 281 is driven in step S111. In this case, since the intermediate arm 261 contracts as the first drive unit 281 is driven, the link unit 402 in the direction in which the movement effect unit 243b moves to the retreat position PA1 even if the drive of the second drive unit 282 is stopped. , 403 continues to rotate. If the rack 333 has not reached the lowest position LA2, the special effect process is repeatedly executed until it reaches.

  In step S112, it is determined whether or not the movement effect unit 243b has reached the retreat position PA1. Here, as described above, based on the detection signal of the arm sensor 325, it is determined whether or not the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state. When the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state, the movement effect unit 243b It is determined that the retreat position PA1 has been reached. Note that, based on the drive angle of the first drive unit 281, it may be determined whether or not the movement effect unit 243 b has reached the retreat position PA <b> 1. For example, the angle of the rotation shaft portion of the first drive unit 281 in the state before the movement effect unit 243b is moved to the effect position PA2 (the second shaft portion 245 is at the lowest position LA1) is used as the reference angle. It is determined whether or not the drive angle of the drive unit 281 has returned to the reference angle. If the drive angle has returned, it is determined that the movement effect unit 243b is at the retreat position PA1.

  When the movement effect part 243b moves to the retreat position PA1, the process proceeds to step S113, and the drive of the first drive part 281 is stopped. In this case, the first decoration device 232 has shifted to the retracted state, and the first special effect has been completed. When the movement effect unit 243b has not reached the retreat position PA1, the special effect process is repeatedly executed until the movement effect unit 243b has reached the retreat position PA1.

  In step S114, the operation process of the second decoration device 233 is executed. The operation process of the second decoration device 233 will be described with reference to FIG.

  In FIG. 26, in step S201, it is determined whether or not the second special effect by the second decoration device 233 is executed. Here, based on the value of the special effect timing determination counter, it is determined whether or not it is time to execute the second special effect. In addition, it is determined in advance whether or not the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state, and when it is in the retracted state, it is determined whether or not the second special effect is to be executed. Incidentally, the determination as to whether or not the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state includes determination as to whether or not the rack 493 is in the lowest position LB2 and the rotation effect unit 403b is at a zero angle. Whether the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2 is determined based on the detection signal of the rack sensor 497, and whether the rotation effect unit 403b is at the zero angle is determined based on the detection signal of the effect sensor 487. Based on.

  When performing the 2nd special production, it progresses to Step S202 and drives link drive part 442 by forward rotation. Accordingly, in the second decoration device 233, the rack 493 moves upward from the lowest position LB2.

  In step S203, it is determined whether or not the rotation restriction of the first link portion 402 and the second link portion 403 by the lock mechanism has been released. Here, based on the detection signal of the rack sensor 497, it is determined whether or not the rack 493 has passed the unlocking position LB3 and moved upward. If the rack 493 has passed the unlocking position LB3, the rotation restriction is performed. It is determined that is released. Note that, based on the drive angle of the link drive unit 442, it may be determined whether or not the rotation restriction by the lock mechanism is released. For example, when the rotation effect unit 403b is moved from the effect position PB2 to the retracted position PB1, the angle of the rotation shaft portion of the link drive unit 442 is set as a reference angle, and the drive angle with respect to the reference angle reaches a predetermined angle. Assuming that the rack 333 has reached the lock release position LB3, it is determined that the rotation restriction by the lock mechanism has been released.

  When the rotation restriction is released, the process proceeds to step S204, and the effect driving unit 475 is started to be driven in the normal rotation. In this case, in addition to the driving force of the link driving unit 442, the rotational force of the effect driving unit 475 is applied to the link units 402 and 403, so that the rotation of the link units 402 and 403 is accelerated. If the rotation restriction is not released, this operation process is repeatedly executed until it is released.

  In step S205, it is determined whether or not the rotation effect unit 403b has reached the effect position PB2. Here, it is determined whether or not the rotation angle of the link drive unit 442 has reached the effect angle, and when the effect angle is reached, the rotation effect unit 403b has reached the effect position PB2. In this case, the second shaft portion 405 and the rack 493 are moved to the uppermost positions HB1 and HB2, respectively. In addition, if a sensor for detecting the angle of the first link portion 402 with respect to the main body portion 401 or the movement of the second shaft portion 405 to the uppermost position HB1 is provided, the rotation effect is based on the detection signal of this sensor. It may be determined whether or not the part 403b has moved to the effect position PB2. For example, based on the detection signal of the sensor, it is determined whether or not the second shaft portion 405 has moved to the uppermost position HB1, and if it has moved, it is determined that the rotation effect portion 403b has reached the effect position PB2.

  When the rotation effect unit 403b reaches the effect position PB2, the process proceeds to step S206, and the drive of the link drive unit 442 is stopped. In this case, the second decoration device 233 shifts to the effect state and executes the second special effect. In addition, after the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the effect position PB2, the effect drive unit 475 is driven so that the rotation effect unit 403b rotates in a manner that enhances the effect. As an aspect which improves a production effect, performing forward rotation and reverse rotation alternately, changing drive speed irregularly, etc. are mentioned, for example. In addition, when the rotation effect part 403b has not reached the effect position PB2, this operation process is repeatedly executed until the effect position PB2 is reached.

  In step S207, it is determined whether or not to end the second special effect. Here, based on the value of the special effect timing determination counter, it is determined whether or not it is time to end the second special effect. In addition, it is determined in advance whether or not the second decoration device 233 is in the effect state, and if it is in the effect state, it is determined whether or not to end the second special effect.

  When ending the second special effect, the process proceeds to step S208, where the link driving unit 442 is driven in reverse rotation, and the effect driving unit 475 is driven in a direction in which the rotation effect unit 403b is at a zero angle. In this case, in the second decoration device 233, the rack 493 moves downward from the uppermost position HB2, and accordingly, the second shaft portion 405 also moves downward from the uppermost position HB1. Thereby, the 1st link part 402 and the 2nd link part 403 rotate in the direction in which the rotation production | presentation part 403b moves to the retracted position PB1. For the effect drive unit 475, it is determined whether the forward rotation or the reverse rotation is smaller in the rotation angle required to shift the rotation effect unit 403b to the zero angle, and the effect is performed in the direction of the smaller required rotation angle. The drive unit 475 is rotated.

  In step S209, based on the detection signal of the effect sensor 487, it is determined whether or not the rotation effect unit 403b has shifted to the zero angle. Note that, based on the rotation angle of the effect drive unit 475, it may be determined whether or not the rotation effect unit 403b is at a zero angle. For example, the effect driving unit 403b is set with the angle of the rotation shaft portion of the effect driving unit 475 in a state before the rotation effect unit 403b is at the retracted position PB1 and before the rotation is started (a state before the effect driving unit 475 is driven) as a reference angle. It is determined whether or not the drive angle of 475 has returned to the reference angle, and when it returns, it is determined that the rotation effect unit 403b has shifted to the zero angle.

  When the rotation effect unit 403b has shifted to the zero angle, the process proceeds to step S210, and the drive of the effect drive unit 475 is stopped. In addition, when the rotation effect part 403b has not shifted to the zero angle, this operation process is repeatedly executed until it reaches.

  In step S211, it is determined whether or not the rotation effect unit 403b has reached the retreat position PB1. Here, as described above, after determining whether or not the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2 based on the detection signal of the rack sensor 497, the rotation effect unit 403b starts moving from the effect position PB2. It is determined whether the rotation angle of the link driving unit 442 has reached the effect angle. When the rack 493 is at the lowest position LB2 and the rotation angle of the link driving unit 442 reaches the effect angle, it is determined that the rotation effect unit 403b has reached the retreat position PB1. As a result, if the rack 493 is at a position lower than the unlock position LB3, the rack 493 has moved to the lowest position LB2 even if the detected portion 498 of the rack 493 is detected by the rack sensor 497. It is possible to improve the accuracy of the determination about things.

  If a sensor that individually detects that the rack 493 is in the lowest position LB2 and the unlocked position LB3 is provided, the rotation effect unit 403b is retracted based on the detection signal of this sensor. It may be determined whether or not the position PB1 has been reached. For example, it is determined whether or not the rack 493 has moved to the lowest position LB2 based on the detection signal of the sensor, and when the rack 493 has moved to the lowest position LB2, determination regarding the rotation angle of the link driving unit 442. It is determined that the rotation effect unit 403b has reached the retreat position PB1 without performing the above.

  When the rotation effect unit 403b moves to the retreat position PB1, the process proceeds to step S212, and the drive of the link drive unit 442 is stopped. In this case, the second decoration device 233 shifts to the retracted state, and the second special effect is ended. In addition, when the rotation effect part 403b has not reached the retreat position PB1, this operation process is repeatedly executed until it reaches.

  According to the embodiment described in detail above, the following excellent effects are obtained.

<About the 1st drive part 281 and the 2nd drive part 282 of the 1st decoration device 232>
Since the 1st decoration apparatus 232 has the link mechanism containing the main-body part 241 and link part 242,243, the movement range of the movement production | presentation part 243b is expanded and the operation | movement aspect of the movement production | presentation part 243b is diversified. It becomes possible. For this reason, the attention degree with respect to the movement production | presentation part 243b can be raised by moving the movement production | presentation part 243b to production | presentation position PA2.

  Since the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are individually provided for the first link unit 242 and the second link unit 243, individually according to the operation modes of the link units 242, 243, etc. The selected motor or the like can be set as the drive units 281 and 282, respectively. For this reason, it is possible to select a motor having a rated torque as large as possible as the first drive unit 281 and a motor having a rated speed as large as possible as the second drive unit 282. As a result, for the purpose of reducing the cost burden, even if a general-purpose motor, not a dedicated product, is selected as the drive units 281 and 282, the link mechanism is operated with respect to the driving force applied to the link mechanism. The maximum speed necessary for quickly moving the movement effect unit 243b to the effect position PA2 can be ensured while ensuring the necessary torque. Therefore, the degree of attention to the effect of the first decoration device 232 can be preferably improved.

  For the rated torque, the first drive unit 281 is larger than the second drive unit 282, and for the rated speed, the second drive unit 282 is larger than the first drive unit 281. The rotation of the parts 242 and 243 can be accelerated quickly by the driving force of the first driving part 281, and the maximum speed can be increased by the second driving part 282. In this case, since the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 only have to play different roles, a general-purpose motor or the like can be selected as the drive units 281 and 282.

  When the first special effect is executed, since the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are driven, the first drive unit 281 has a higher drive speed and the second drive unit 282 is driven. It can be used as a period for acceleration. Therefore, the rotational speed of the link parts 242 and 243 can be increased by selectively using the driving force with the larger driving speed for each of the driving parts 281 and 282.

  When the first special effect is executed, the rack 333 that moves as the second driving unit 282 is driven catches up with the second shaft unit 245 that moves as the first driving unit 281 is driven, and then the first driving unit. Since the drive of 281 is stopped, it can be avoided that the first drive unit 281 serves as a power generation brake.

  Since the effect angle of the rotation shaft portion of the second drive unit 282 is larger than the effect angle of the rotation shaft portion of the first drive unit 281, the rotation necessary for the drive speed of the second drive unit 282 to reach the rated speed is ensured. It becomes easy to secure. In this case, when the movement effect part 243b is moved to the effect position PA2, the maximum value of the performance of the second drive part 282 is exhibited, so that the rotation speed of the link parts 242 and 243 can be increased.

  At the end of the first special effect, the drive start and stop of the first drive unit 281 are performed after the drive start and stop of the second drive unit 282, so that the peak value of power consumption can be suppressed. This is effective for maintenance of electric power facilities in a game hall where a plurality of pachinko machines 10 are installed.

  Since the hook hole 335 is formed in the rack 333, the second shaft portion 245 can be moved relative to the rack 333, so that it is driven by the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282. A difference in speed can be allowed between the second shaft portion 245 and the rack 333. Therefore, unlike the configuration in which the second shaft portion 245 cannot move relative to the rack 333, when the first special effect is started, the moving speed of the rack 333 accompanying the driving of the first driving portion 281 is the second speed. It can be avoided that the speed is lowered in accordance with the moving speed of the second shaft portion 245 due to the driving of the driving portion 282. Therefore, it is possible to increase the moving speed of the moving effect unit 243b immediately after the link units 242 and 243 start to rotate in the effect direction.

  Since the movement direction of the second shaft portion 245 with respect to the rack 333 coincides with the movement direction of the rack 333 with respect to the main body portion 241, the rack 333 pushes the second shaft portion 245, or the second shaft portion 245 moves to the rack 333. Loss of force is less likely to occur when pressing. In this case, since the driving force of the drive units 281 and 282 is efficiently transmitted to the link units 242 and 243, the rotation speed of the link units 242 and 243 can be increased.

  Since the rotational movement of the second drive unit 282 is converted into the linear movement of the rack 333 by the pinion gear 332 and the rack 333, loss when the driving force of the second drive unit 282 is transmitted to the rack 333 is less likely to occur. .

  Since the urging force of the spring member 291 is applied to the link parts 242 and 243 in the direction of the effect, the rotation speed of the link parts 242 and 243 can be increased. In addition, the biasing force of the spring member 291 is larger when the movement effect portion 243b is at the retracted position PA1 than when the movement effect portion 243b is at the effect position PA2. It has become. On the other hand, when the first special performance is finished, after the second drive unit 282 having the smaller rated torque is started and stopped, the first drive unit 281 having the larger rated torque is started and By stopping, it is possible to suppress the rotation of the link portions 242 and 243 in the retracted direction from being excessively delayed by the biasing force of the spring member 291 while suppressing the peak value of power consumption.

  Since both the drive units 281 and 282 are mounted on the main body unit 241, the link units 242 and 243 can be reduced in weight as compared with the configuration in which the drive units 281 and 282 are mounted on the link units 242 and 243. Can do. In this case, a motor or the like having a small rated torque can be selected as the drive units 281 and 282, so that the rotation speed of the link units 242 and 243 can be improved.

  Since the first shaft portion 244 is arranged on the extension line of the main body guide portion 251, even if the second shaft portion 245 moves to the dead point, the rotation of the link portions 242, 243 depends on the driving direction of the first drive portion 281. The moving direction can be selected appropriately. For this reason, since the dead range is included in the movement range of the second shaft portion 245, a configuration in which the movement range of the movement effect unit 243b is ensured as much as possible can be realized, and even in this configuration, the link unit 242 is also realized. , 243 can be rotated in an appropriate direction.

<About the intermediate arm 261 of the first decoration device 232>
Since the driving force of the first drive unit 281 is applied to the intermediate position of the first link unit 242 via the intermediate arm 261, the link-side shaft unit 263 of the intermediate arm 261 becomes the first shaft unit 244 of the first link unit 242. The moment of force for rotating the first link portion 242 can be increased by the distance from the first link portion 242. For this reason, even if a motor having a rated torque that is as small as possible is selected as the first driving unit 281, a moment of force for rotating the link units 242 and 243 is ensured. Is possible. As a result, a motor having a rated speed as large as possible can be selected as the first drive unit 281. In this case, it is possible to increase the rotation speed of the link parts 242 and 243 in the effect direction, and as a result, the degree of attention to the effect of the first decoration device 232 can be preferably improved.

  Since the link parts 242 and 243 rotate in the direction of production or retraction as the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts, even if the intermediate arm 261 is connected to the intermediate position of the first link part 242, the intermediate arm 261 is The structure which does not restrict | limit the rotation range of 1 link part 242 is realizable.

  Since the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts in a state in which the intermediate shaft portion 266 is bent about the intermediate shaft portion 266, a configuration for converting the rotational motion of the first drive portion 281 into the telescopic motion of the intermediate arm 261 can be easily realized. Further, when the intermediate arm 261 is expanded and contracted, the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 rotate together with the first link portion 242, and therefore the rotation of the second arm portion 265 rotates around the first link portion 242. A configuration that does not hinder dynamic movements can be realized.

  Since the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state, the rotation of the link parts 242 and 243 in the production direction is restricted. Therefore, the intermediate arm 261 can be moved without using a dedicated member that operates independently of the link parts 242 and 243. It can suppress that the production | presentation part 243b appears unintentionally ahead of the display screen 75a. In this case, it is possible to prevent the configuration of the first decoration device 232 from becoming complicated in realizing a configuration that can appropriately move the movement effect unit 243b.

  Since the intermediate arm 261 extends from the first link portion 242 toward the opposite side of the effect position PA2 when in the contracted state, the intermediate arm 261b when the movement effect portion 243b is at the retracted position PA1. It can be avoided that 261 is exposed in front of the display screen 75a. In addition, in this case, a configuration in which the intermediate arm 261 is disposed on the side opposite to the effect position PA2 across the first link portion 242 can be realized regardless of the rotation state of the link portions 242, 243. The one link part 242 and the intermediate arm 261 can be arranged along the width direction of the main body part 241. Thereby, the thickness dimension of the 1st decoration apparatus 232 can be reduced compared with the structure by which the intermediate | middle arm 261 is arrange | positioned between the main-body part 241 and the 1st link part 242, for example. Reducing the thickness dimension of the first decoration device 232 is effective in installing the first decoration device 232 in a limited area on the back side of the game board 60a (between the game board 60a and the unit main body 231). It is.

  When the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state, the reverse rotation of the second arm portion 265 is restricted by the reverse rotation stopper 269, so that the intermediate arm is in spite of the same driving direction of the first drive portion 281. It can be avoided that both expansion and contraction of 261 are performed. Therefore, by selecting the driving direction of the first driving unit 281, the expansion and contraction of the intermediate arm 261 can be properly managed.

  In the intermediate arm 261, since the driving force of the first drive unit 281 is applied to the second arm unit 265, the first drive unit 281 and the first transmission unit 301 are mounted on the intermediate arm 261 and the first link unit 242. There is no need. Therefore, the first link part 242 and the intermediate arm 261 can be reduced in weight, and as a result, the rotation speed of the link parts 242 and 243 in the direction of presentation can be increased.

  When the movement effect part 243b is at the effect position PA2, the intermediate arm 261 contracts because the link angle α1 of the second link part 243 with respect to the first link part 242 is equal to or smaller than a predetermined angle (for example, 90 degrees). Thus, the rotation of the first link portion 242 in the retracted direction is restricted. For this reason, even if the driving of the drive units 281 and 282 is stopped after the movement effect unit 243b has moved to the effect position PA2, it is possible to prevent the link units 242 and 243 from unintentionally rotating in the retracted direction. . That is, unintentional movement of the movement effect unit 243b toward the retreat position PA1 can be suppressed.

  Even when the link angle α1 is equal to or smaller than the predetermined angle, the second shaft portion 245 moves in a direction (downward) that rotates the second link portion 243 in the retracted direction, so that the first due to the contraction of the intermediate arm 261. The rotation restriction of the link part 242 can be released. For this reason, even if a dedicated member that operates independently of the link parts 242 and 243 is not provided, the link part 242 in the retracted direction is utilized by utilizing a part of the operation of the link mechanism that is the movement of the second shaft part 245. , 243 can be resumed.

  When the link angle α1 becomes larger than a predetermined angle with the end of the first special effect, the link arm 241, 243 is retracted by the intermediate arm 261 contracting with the start of driving of the first drive unit 281. Since it rotates, the driving force of the 1st drive part 281 can be used about rotation of both the production | presentation direction and retraction | saving direction of the link parts 242,243. Therefore, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated drive unit for rotating the link units 242 and 243 in the retracted direction, and thus the cost burden can be reduced.

  When the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts, the first arm portion 264 rotates with respect to the second arm portion 265 about the intermediate shaft portion 266, and the first arm portion 264 and the intermediate shaft portion 266 together with the second arm. Since there are both cases where the sliding movement occurs along the longitudinal direction of the portion 265, the arm portions 264, 265 do not necessarily have to rotate when the link portions 242, 243 rotate in the retracted direction. That is, when the intermediate arm 261 is retracted from the extended state, the first transmission unit 301 does not necessarily have to operate. Therefore, when the link parts 242 and 243 are rotated in the retracted direction by the driving force of the second drive part 282, it is not necessary to consume power for operating the first transmission part 301.

  When the first special effect is finished, the drive start and stop of the first drive unit 281 are performed after the start and stop of the second drive unit 282, so that both the drive units 281 and 282 overlap each other. Compared with the driving configuration, the peak value of power consumption can be suppressed.

  Since the intermediate arm 261 is disposed at a position hidden behind the protruding portion 271 of the second link portion 243, it is possible to realize a state in which the intermediate arm 261 is difficult to see from the front of the gaming machine. Further, since the intermediate arm 261 is arranged side by side with the first link portion 242 in the width direction of the main body portion 241, for example, the intermediate arm 261 is arranged at a position overlapping the first link portion 242 in the front-rear direction. The thickness dimension of the first decoration device 232 can be reduced.

<About the rotation effect unit 403b and the effect drive unit 475 of the second decoration device 233>
In the second link unit 403, by operating both the link unit main body 403a and the rotation effect unit 403b, the movement range of the rotation effect unit 403b is expanded and the operation mode of the rotation effect unit 403b is diversified. Is possible. For this reason, the attention degree with respect to the rotation effect part 403b can be raised by moving the rotation effect part 403b to the effect position PB2.

  Since the driving force is individually applied from the link driving unit 442 and the effect driving unit 475 to each of the link unit main body 403a and the rotation effect unit 403b, each of the operation modes of the link unit main body 403a and the rotation effect unit 403b, etc. In addition, individually selected motors or the like can be set as the drive units 442 and 475. For this reason, it is possible to select a motor having a maximum rated torque as much as possible as the link driving unit 442 and to select a motor having a maximum rated speed as much as possible as the rotation effect unit 403b. In this case, for the purpose of reducing the cost burden, even if a general-purpose motor, not a dedicated product, is selected as the link driving unit 442 or the effect driving unit 475, the force required to rotate the link unit main body 403a It is possible to secure the rotation speed necessary to enhance the effect of the rotation by the rotation effect unit 403b while ensuring the moment.

  In addition, when the link unit main body 403a rotates in the production direction, the rotation production unit 403b rotates in accordance with the production direction, so the rotational force of the rotation production unit 403b is used for speeding up the rotation of the link unit main body 403a. can do. In this case, the effect of the rotation effect unit 403b can be enhanced by improving the rotation speed of the rotation effect unit 403b. Therefore, the degree of attention to the effect of the second decoration device 233 can be preferably improved.

  When the rotation effect part 403b is formed in a long shape and the link parts 402 and 403 rotate in the effect direction, the rotation effect part 403b starts to rotate from a position higher than the upper end part of the link part main body 403a. The moment of force that moves the upper end of the rotation effect unit 403b can be used to accelerate the upper end of the link unit main body 403a.

  In addition, since the effect shaft portion 407 is arranged at the center in the longitudinal direction of the rotation effect portion 403b, the center of gravity of the rotation effect portion 403b is not displaced even when the rotation effect portion 403b rotates. Therefore, it can be avoided that the rotational force applied from the rotation effect unit 403b to the link body 403a increases or decreases as the center of gravity of the rotation effect unit 403b moves. Thereby, the link part main body 403a can be rotated in the production direction in a stable state.

  When the second special effect is executed, the rotation effect unit 403b starts rotating after the link unit main body 403a starts rotating, and thus other devices arranged on the back side of the game board 60a, etc. It can be avoided that the rotation rendering unit 403b comes into contact with the other.

  Since the second shaft portion 405 is linearly slid by the driving force of the link drive unit 442, the amount of drive of the link drive unit 442 required to move the rotation effect unit 403b from the retracted position PB1 to the effect position PB2 is For example, it becomes larger than the configuration in which the first shaft portion 404 is rotated by the driving force of the link driving portion 442. Here, in order to increase the rotation speed of the link sections 402 and 403, from the viewpoint that it is preferable to select a motor having a rated speed as large as possible as the link driving section 442, until the link driving section 442 reaches the rated speed. The required drive amount can be secured. In addition, when the rotation of the link units 402 and 403 is started, the rotation of the link units 402 and 403 is accelerated by the rotational force of the rotation effect unit 403b in addition to the driving force of the link driving unit 442. Even if the rated torque of the link drive unit 442 is insufficient in accelerating 403, the shortage can be compensated by the rotational force of the rotation effect unit 403b.

  Since the second decoration device 233 has a link mechanism including the main body portion 401 and the link portions 402 and 403, the movement range of the rotation effect portion 403b is expanded and the operation mode of the rotation effect portion 403b is diversified. It becomes possible. Further, when the rotation effect portion 403b is at the retracted position PB1, the reverse rotation stopper 469 and the upper cover body 465 restrict the rotation of the link portions 402 and 403 in the retracted direction. On the side, it is possible to avoid the rotation rendering unit 403b, the first link unit 402, and the like from contacting other devices.

  In the longitudinal direction of the link unit main body 403a, the effect shaft part 407 and the effect drive part 475 are arranged at positions where they do not overlap. For example, the effect axis part 407 and the effect drive part 475 are arranged at positions where the axes match each other. The thickness dimension of the 2nd link part 403 can be reduced compared with the comprised structure.

  Furthermore, since the effect drive unit 475 is arranged at a position not included in the rotation range of the rotation effect unit 403b, the effect drive unit 475 and the rotation effect unit 403b can be arranged side by side in the longitudinal direction of the link body 403a. . In this case, since it is not necessary to separate the rotation effect part 403b from the link part main body 403a to avoid contact with the effect drive part 475, the thickness dimension of the second link part 403 can be made as small as possible.

<About the rotation restricting member 511 and the rack receiving portion 521 of the second decoration device 233>
Since the restriction hooking portion 515 of the rotation restricting member 511 is hooked on the rack receiving portion 521 of the rack 493, the link portions 402 and 403 are restricted from rotating in the direction of production, and thus independent of the link portions 402 and 403. Even if the dedicated member that operates in this manner is not installed in the second decoration device 233, it is possible to prevent the rotation effect unit 403b from unintentionally appearing in front of the display screen 75a. In this case, since it can restrict | limit when the movement of the rotation effect part 403b to the effect position PB2 is intended, it can raise the expectation degree of the game with respect to the rotation effect part 403b moving to the effect position PB2.

  The movement locus of the restriction hooking portion 515 extends in a curved shape due to the rotation of the rotation restriction member 511. On the other hand, since the movement locus of the rack receiving portion 521 is linear along the movement direction of the rack 493, the extending direction of the movement locus is unified in a predetermined direction (vertical direction). Therefore, in order to intersect the movement locus of the restriction catching portion 515 of the rotation restricting member 511 with the movement locus of the rack receiving portion 521, the movement locus of the restriction catching portion 515 with respect to the linear movement locus of the rack receiving portion 521. For example, the positions of the rack receiving portion 521 and the restriction hooking portion 515 are compared with the configuration in which the movement trajectories of the restriction hooking portion 515 and the rack receiving portion 521 are both curved. Matching becomes easy. Thereby, it can suppress that the operation | work which sets the relative operation | movement aspect of the rack 493 and the rotation control member 511 becomes complicated.

  Since the rotation restricting member 511 is connected to the first link portion 402 via the connecting member 512, even if the rotation restricting member 511 is disposed at a position separated from the first link portion 402, the rotation restricting member A configuration in which 511 rotates in conjunction with the first link unit 402 can be realized. In addition, since the degree of freedom regarding the installation position of the rotation restricting member 511 is enhanced by the connecting member 512, the rotation restricting member 511 can be disposed at a position where the restricting catching portion 515 is hooked on the rack receiving portion 521.

  Since the restriction shaft portion 513 and the restriction connection portion 516 in the rotation restriction member 511 are arranged along the arrangement direction of the first shaft portion 404 and the bulging connection portion 517 in the first link portion 402, the first Since the displacement amount of the bulging connection portion 517 accompanying the rotation of the link portion 402 can be directly applied to the restriction connection portion 516, the displacement amount necessary for hooking and releasing the restriction hook portion 515 with respect to the rack receiving portion 521 can be obtained. Thus, the rotation restricting member 511 can be properly secured. In addition, the configuration in which the rotation restricting member 511 rotates with the rotation of the first link portion 402 can be prevented from becoming complicated.

  Since the rack receiving portion 521 is provided in the rack 493 for converting the rotational motion of the link driving portion 442 into a straight motion, the rack receiving portion 521 is dedicated to operate independently of the link mechanism in order to cause the rack receiving portion 521 to move straight forward. There is no need to provide a member. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the configuration of the lock mechanism that restricts the rotation of the link portions 402 and 403 from becoming complicated.

  When the rack 493 moves for the execution of the second special effect, there are an operation for releasing the catch between the restriction hooking portion 515 and the rack receiving portion 521 and an operation for moving the second shaft portion 405 by the rack 493. Since the operations are performed in order at non-overlapping timing, the peak value of the driving torque necessary for performing each operation can be reduced as compared with the configuration in which these operations are performed simultaneously. Therefore, as the link drive unit 442 that drives to move the rack 493, it is possible to select a motor or the like having a smaller rated torque and a larger rated speed by the amount corresponding to the reduced peak value. Thereby, the rotational speed to the production direction of link part 402,403 accompanying the drive of the link drive part 442 can be made quick.

  Since the movement direction of the second shaft portion 405 with respect to the rack 493 coincides with the movement direction of the rack 493 with respect to the main body portion 401, the rack 493 pushes the second shaft portion 405 or the second shaft portion 405 moves to the rack 493. Loss of force is less likely to occur when pressing. In this case, since the driving force of the link drive unit 442 is efficiently transmitted to the link units 402 and 403 and the rotation restricting member 511, the rotation speed of the link units 402 and 403 is increased, or the restriction hooking unit 515 and the rack receiver It becomes possible to properly perform the catching and releasing of the catching with the part 521.

  Since the rotation restricting member 511 is disposed on the opposite side of the link portions 402 and 403 across the rack 493, the rotation restricting member 511 can be prevented from hindering the rotation of the link portions 402 and 403.

  When the rotation effect portion 403b is in the retracted position PB1, the rotation of the link portions 402 and 403 is restricted against the urging force of the spring member 451 because the restriction hooking portion 515 and the rack receiving portion 521 are hooked. Therefore, it is preferable that the rotation effect unit 403b appears unintentionally in front of the display screen 75a even when the appearance speed of the rotation effect unit 403b is increased by the biasing force of the spring member 451. Can be suppressed.

<Other embodiments>
In addition, it is not limited to the description content of each embodiment mentioned above, For example, you may implement as follows. Incidentally, each of the following configurations may be individually applied to each of the above embodiments, or a part or all of them may be combined and applied to each of the above embodiments.

  (A1) In the first embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the second shaft portion 245 is slidable along the main body portion 241, but the second shaft portion 245 is along the second link portion 243. It may be slidable. Even in this case, the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243 rotate in a direction in which the third shaft portion 246 approaches the second shaft portion 245, so that the movement effect portion 243b moves toward the retracted position. . Moreover, the 1st link part 242 and the 2nd link part 243 rotate in the direction in which the 3rd axial part 246 moves away from the 2nd axial part 245, and the movement effect part 243b moves toward an effect position. Note that the second shaft portion 245 may be slidable relative to both the main body portion 241 and the second link portion 243.

  Further, the third shaft portion 246 may be a slide shaft portion that is slidable along at least one of the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243. Even in this case, the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243 rotate in a direction in which the third shaft portion 246 approaches at least one of the first shaft portion 244 and the second shaft portion 245, so that the movement effect portion 243b moves toward the retracted position. In addition, the first link unit 242 and the second link unit 243 are rotated in a direction in which the third shaft unit 246 moves away from at least one of the first shaft unit 244 and the second shaft unit 245, so that the movement effect unit 243b is rotated. Move toward the production position.

  (A2) In the first embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the movement effect unit 243b is included in the second link unit 243, but the movement effect unit 243b may be included in the first link unit 242. . Even in this case, the movement effect unit 243b moves toward the effect position by the rotation of the link parts 242 and 243 so that the second shaft part 245 approaches the first shaft part 244, and the second shaft part 245 moves. The link parts 242 and 243 rotate in a direction away from the first shaft part 244 to move toward the retracted position.

  (A3) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the movement effect unit 243b moves toward the effect position PA2 when the second shaft portion 245 approaches the first shaft portion 244. The movement effect unit 243b may move toward the retreat position PA1 when the shaft portion 245 approaches the first shaft portion 244. For example, when the second shaft portion 245 approaches the first shaft portion 244, the third shaft portion 246 moves toward the side opposite to the effect position PA2 (the side opposite to the second decoration device 233). To do. In this configuration, in the second link portion 243, the movement effect portion 243b extends from the link portion main body 243a toward the effect position PA2, and the movement effect portion 243b protrudes closer to the effect position PA2 than the third shaft portion 246. The part appears in front of the display screen 75a.

  (A4) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the first shaft portion 244 is disposed on the extension line of the main body guide portion 251, but the first shaft portion 244 is on the extension line of the main body guide portion 251. It may not be arranged. For example, the first shaft portion 244 is configured to be disposed closer to the effect position PA2 than the extension line of the main body guide portion 251.

  (A5) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the first link part 242 and the second link part 243 are arranged on the front side of the main body part 241, but these link parts 242 and 243 are the main body part 241. It may be arranged on the back side. Even in this case, if the main body 241 is arranged at a position hidden behind the game board 60a, it can be avoided that the main body 241 is exposed in front of the gaming machine.

  (A6) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the second shaft portion 245 can be moved relative to the rack 333. However, the second shaft portion 245 moves relative to the rack 333. You may connect with respect to the rack 333 in the state which does not carry out.

  (A7) In the above-described embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the rotational motion of the first drive unit 281 is converted into the linear motion of the second shaft portion 245 by the rack 333 and the pinion gear 332. Any configuration may be used as long as the rotational motion is converted into the straight motion. An example of the motion conversion means is a configuration in which the winding unit winds a linear member such as a wire. For example, a linear member is connected to the second shaft portion 245, and the winding portion rotates in accordance with the rotation of the first drive portion 281, so that the rotational movement of the first drive portion 281 advances linearly of the second shaft portion 245. Converted into movement.

  (A8) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the spring member 291 is provided in a state of being spanned between the first link part 242 and the main body part 241, but the spring member 291 is provided with the second link. It may be provided in a state of being spanned between the portion 243 and the main body portion 241, or may be provided in a state of being spanned between the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243. In short, it is only necessary that the spring member 291 is provided in a state in which the link units 242 and 243 are urged in the direction in which the movement effect unit 243b moves to the effect position PA2.

  (A9) In the first embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the main body guide portion 251 is the main body long hole 251a. However, the main body guide portion 251 has a convex portion that protrudes outside the main body portion 241 or a concave portion on the inner side. It may be formed by a concave portion. In this case, the ascending stopper 252 of the main body guide portion 251 may be formed by a convex portion or a concave portion instead of the ceiling surface 251b of the main body long hole 251a.

  (A10) In the above-described embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the rack 333 as the moving member moves in the state where the second shaft portion 245 is hooked in the hook hole 335, but the second shaft portion 245 is moved to the rack 333. You may move in the state caught on the convex part which protruded outside, or the concave part dented inside. In this case, the 1st pushing part and the 2nd pushing part which push the 2nd axial part 245 should just be formed with the convex part and the recessed part instead of the ceiling surface 335a and the bottom face 335b of the hook hole 335. FIG.

  (A11) In the above embodiment, the first decoration device 232 is configured such that the driving force of the first drive unit 281 is applied to the first link unit 242 via the intermediate arm 261. A driving force may be applied to the first link part 242 without passing through the intermediate arm 261. For example, the rotation shaft portion of the first drive unit 281 is configured to be connected to the first shaft portion 244 via a gear or the like.

  (A12) In the embodiment described above, the drive source such as the motor that performs the rotational motion is the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 in the first decoration device 232. The first driving unit 281 and the second driving unit 282 may be used. For example, the drive source that performs the straight movement is the second drive unit 282. In this configuration, the second driving unit 282 may directly apply the driving force to the second driving unit 282 without passing through the second transmission unit 302.

  (A13) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the rated torque of the first driving unit 281 is larger than that of the second driving unit 282, and the second driving unit 282 is rated more than the first driving unit 281. Although the speed is increased, the rated torque may be greater in the second drive unit 282 than in the first drive unit 281, and the rated speed is greater in the first drive unit 281 than in the second drive unit 282. May be. Further, the rated torque and the rated speed may be the same between the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282.

  In addition, the driving force of the first driving unit 281 and the second driving unit 282 is converted by the first transmission unit 301 and the second transmission unit 302, thereby rotating the first link unit 242 and the second link unit 243. The drive speed and drive torque for this may be increased or decreased. For example, the first transmission unit 301 is set to have a speed transmission ratio larger than that of the second transmission unit 302. In this configuration, even if the rated torque is the same between the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282, the drive torque of the drive force applied to the first link unit 242 is applied to the second link unit 243. It can be made larger than the driving torque of the driving force. Further, the driving speed of the driving force applied to the second link portion 243 can be made larger than the driving speed of the driving force applied to the first link portion 242.

  Further, the effect angle of the first drive unit 281 may be larger than the effect angle of the second drive unit 282.

  (A14) In the above embodiment, when the first special effect is executed, the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 start driving simultaneously. However, the drive units 281 and 282 are at different timings. The driving may be started. For example, the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are configured to start driving continuously at a predetermined interval (for example, 10 msec).

  In addition, after the first driving unit 281 starts driving, the second driving unit 282 starts driving when a predetermined condition is satisfied. In this configuration, the first link portion 242 and the second link portion 243 rotate as the first drive portion 281 starts driving, and the second shaft portion 245 moves up from the lowest position LA1 to push up the rack 333. It will be. Here, as the predetermined condition, the rack 333 is moved upward from the lowest position LA2.

  In this configuration, the MPU 702 of the display control device 170 starts driving the first drive unit 281 and then moves the rack 333 upward from the lowest position LA2 based on the detection signal of the second rack sensor 337 of the second shaft unit 245. In the case of moving upward from the lowest position LA2, the drive of the first drive unit 281 is stopped, and then the second drive unit 282 is started to drive. When the second drive unit 282 starts driving, the rack 333 is raised, so that the bottom surface 335b of the hook hole 335 is hooked on the second shaft portion 245, and the rack 333 pushes up the second shaft portion 245 in this state. Become. For this reason, even after the driving of the first drive unit 281 is stopped, the link units 242 and 243 continue to rotate, and thereby the movement effect unit 243b moves to the effect position PA2.

  According to this configuration, when the movement effect unit 243b is moved from the retracted position PA1 to the effect position PA2, the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are sequentially driven at a timing that does not overlap. The peak value can be suppressed.

  (A15) In the above embodiment, when the first special effect is executed, when both the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are driven, the intermediate arm 261 is in a folded state. Although the first drive unit 281 is configured to stop driving, the first drive unit 281 only needs to be stopped when the movement effect unit 243b reaches the drive stop position. For example, a sensor that detects that the movement effect unit 243b has reached the drive stop position is provided, and the first drive unit 281 is stopped based on a detection signal of the sensor. As this sensor, a sensor for detecting the angle of the first link part 242 with respect to the second link part 243, a sensor for detecting the rotation angle of the rotary shaft part of the first drive part 281 and the position of the second shaft part 245 are detected. Sensor to be used.

  Further, when the rising speed of the rack 333 by the driving force of the second driving unit 282 exceeds the rising speed of the second shaft portion 245 by the driving force of the first driving unit 281, the driving of the first driving unit 281 is stopped. It is good also as a structure. According to this structure, it can suppress that the 1st drive part 281 acts like a power generation brake.

  Further, when the intermediate arm 261 is folded, the transmission of the driving force from the first drive unit 281 to the intermediate arm 261 may be blocked. For example, the arm-side gear 322 of the first transmission unit 301 is provided with a toothless portion without a gear. In this configuration, when the intermediate arm 261 shifts to the broken state, the arm-side gear 322 is not engaged with the first gear 321 by the toothless portion, and the driving force from the first drive unit 281 to the intermediate arm 261 is reduced. Transmission is interrupted.

  (A16) In the above embodiment, when the first special effect is executed, the first drive unit 281 is first stopped from the state where both the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are driven. Thereafter, the driving of the second driving unit 282 is stopped. However, the driving of the second driving unit 282 may be stopped first, and the driving units 281 and 282 may be stopped simultaneously.

  (A17) In the above embodiment, when the first special effect is finished, the first drive unit 281 is started and stopped after the second drive unit 282 is started and stopped. The order of may be reversed. In short, if the configuration is such that the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 are sequentially driven at a timing that does not overlap, the power consumption is higher than the configuration in which the drive units 281 and 282 are driven at the same timing. The peak value of can be reduced.

  Further, the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282 may be driven at overlapping timings. For example, the first driving unit 281 and the second driving unit 282 are configured to start driving simultaneously and stop driving simultaneously.

  (B1) In the above embodiment, the first decoration device 232 is provided with the first drive unit 281 and the second drive unit 282, but only one of them may be provided. For example, only the first drive unit 281 is provided, and the driving force of the first drive unit 281 is supplied to the first link unit 242 and the second link unit 243 via at least one of the first transmission unit 301 and the second transmission unit 302. It is set as the structure given to. Even in this configuration, if the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts as the first driving unit 281 is driven, the link units 242 and 243 can be rotated by the expansion and contraction of the intermediate arm 261.

  (B2) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the intermediate arm 261 has the two link portions 242, 243, but may have three or more link portions. In addition, these link portions may be relatively slid along the respective longitudinal directions instead of relatively rotating. Even in this case, the intermediate arm 261 shifts to a contracted state by sliding the plurality of link portions in an overlapping direction, and the intermediate arm 261 moves by sliding the plurality of link portions in a direction in which the overlapping portions become shorter. Will shift to the stretched state.

  (B3) In the above embodiment, the intermediate arm 261 is connected between the first shaft portion 244 and the third shaft portion 246 in the first link portion 242 of the first decoration device 232. , Any part of the first link part 242 may be connected. For example, the intermediate arm 261 is connected to the bulging portion 294 of the first link portion 242. Even in this case, the first link portion 242 rotates as the intermediate arm 261 expands and contracts.

  (B4) In the first embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the movement effect unit 243b moves toward the effect position PA2 when the intermediate arm 261 extends, and toward the retreat position PA1 when the intermediate arm 261 contracts. The movement effect unit 243b may move toward the retraction position PA1 when the intermediate arm 261 extends, and move toward the effect position PA2 when the intermediate arm 261 contracts. For example, the intermediate arm 261 is not arranged on the side opposite to the effect position PA2 across the first link part 242, but is arranged on the effect position PA2 side from the first link part 242. In this configuration, the main body side shaft portion 262 of the intermediate arm 261 is disposed closer to the effect position PA2 than the link side shaft portion 263, and the intermediate arm 261 draws the first link portion 242 toward the main body side shaft portion 262. Thus, the movement effect unit 243b moves toward the effect position PA2.

  (B5) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, when the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state, the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 overlap each other in the axial direction of the intermediate shaft portion 266. However, in this case, the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265 may be arranged side by side along the rotation direction of the arm portions 264 and 265. Even in this configuration, these arm portions 264 and 265 overlap in parallel, so that the intermediate arm 261 is in a contracted state.

  (B6) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the main body side shaft portion 262 does not enter between the first link portion 242 and the main body portion 241 regardless of the rotation state of the first link portion 242. The main body side shaft portion 262 may be disposed at a position where the main body side shaft portion 262 enters between the first link portion 242 and the main body portion 241 when the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state.

  (B7) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the intermediate arm 261 in the contracted state comes into contact with the reverse rotation stopper 269 from below, so that the intermediate arm 261 (the first arm portion 264 and the second arm portion 265) is contacted. The rotation of the intermediate arm 261 may be controlled by the intermediate arm 261 in the contracted state coming into contact with the reverse rotation stopper 269 from above. Even in this configuration, since the extension of the intermediate arm 261 is restricted by the reverse rotation stopper 269, the expansion / contraction state of the intermediate arm 261 can be properly managed by controlling the driving direction of the first drive unit 281.

  Further, the reverse rotation stopper 269 may be provided in the first link portion 242, the first arm portion 264, and the second arm portion 265 instead of the main body portion 241. For example, the convex part which protruded toward the 1st arm part 264 side from the 2nd arm part 265 is set as the reverse rotation stopper 269. In this configuration, when the intermediate arm 261 is in the contracted state, the reverse rotation stopper 269 comes into contact with the first arm portion 264 from one side in the rotation direction of the first arm portion 264, so that the second arm portion The rotation of the first arm portion 264 with respect to 265 is restricted.

  (B8) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, when the movement effect unit 243b is at the effect position PA2, the second link unit 243 is in a contraction restricting state that restricts the contraction of the intermediate arm 261. The second link part 243 may always be in a contraction permitted state without shifting to the contraction restricted state.

  (B9) In the above embodiment, in the intermediate arm 261 of the first decoration device 232, the intermediate shaft portion 266 slides along the second arm portion 265. However, the intermediate shaft portion 266 has the first arm portion 264. It is good also as a structure which slides along. That is, the arm long hole 265a may be formed in the first arm portion 264.

  (B10) In the above embodiment, in the first decoration device 232, the intermediate arm 261 is provided side by side with the first link part 242, but the intermediate arm 261 is provided between the first link part 242 and the main body part 241. Alternatively, it may be provided between the first link part 242 and the second link part 243.

  (C1) About the structure of the link mechanism of the 2nd decoration device 233, it is good also as a structure of (a1)-(a10) similarly to the 1st decoration device 232. In this case, the main body portion, the first link portion, the second link portion, the first shaft portion, the second shaft portion, the third shaft portion, the spring member, the main body guide portion, the main body long hole, the rack, the hook hole, and the effect The position, the retreat position, and the like are replaced as they are, and the movement effect unit 243b is replaced with the rotation effect unit 403b.

  (C2) In the second decoration device 233, in the configuration in which the rotation of the second link unit 243 is accelerated by the rotational force of the rotation effect unit 403b, the link mechanism may not be constructed. For example, the first link portion 242 is not provided, and the link portion main body 243a of the second link portion 243 is used as an effect arm, and the effect arm rotates around the second shaft portion 245. Even in this configuration, the rotation speed of the effect arm can be increased by rotating the rotation effect unit 403b in accordance with the rotation of the effect arm.

  In this case, the effect arm may be rotated as the second shaft portion 245 slides. For example, a gear is fixed to the second shaft portion 245, and a plurality of teeth that mesh with the gear are provided in the main body guide portion 251. In this configuration, when the plurality of teeth of the main body guide portion 251 are arranged along the sliding direction of the second shaft portion 245, and the second shaft portion 245 slides along the main body guide portion 251, the second tooth The gear of the shaft portion 245 rotates and the effect arm rotates.

  (C3) In the above embodiment, in the second link unit 403 of the second decoration device 233, the rotation effect unit 403b is arranged at the rotation tip of the link unit main body 243a, but the rotation effect unit 403b is the link unit main body. You may arrange | position in the intermediate part of 243a. For example, the rotation effect part 403b is configured to be disposed between the rotation tip part of the link part main body 403a and the third shaft part 406. In this configuration, the rotation radius of the rotation effect unit 403b may be smaller than the separation distance between the rotation tip portion of the link portion main body 243a and the effect shaft portion 407. In other words, when the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state, the rotation effect unit 403b does not have to protrude from the link main body 403a toward the rotation tip side.

  (C4) In the above embodiment, in the second link unit 403 of the second decoration device 233, the effect shaft part 407 is arranged at a position overlapping the center of gravity of the rotation effect part 403b, but the effect shaft part 407 is a rotation effect. You may arrange | position in the position which does not overlap with the gravity center of the part 403b. As this structure, it is set as the structure by which the production shaft part 407 was arrange | positioned in the position shifted | deviated from the center part of the rotation production | generation part 403b, or the weight member was provided in the one end side among the both ends of the rotation production | generation part 403b.

  In the configuration in which the effect shaft portion 407 is disposed at a position deviated from the center of gravity of the rotation effect portion 403b, when the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state, the rotation effect portion 403b has a center of gravity at a position higher than the effect shaft portion 407. It is preferable to be held at a zero angle in the direction in which is disposed. In this case, when the second special effect is executed, the rotation speed of the rotation effect unit 403b can be increased by using gravity that pulls the center of gravity of the rotation effect unit 403b to a position lower than the effect shaft unit 407. For this reason, the rotational force of the rotation production | presentation part 403b becomes large, and, thereby, the rotational speed of the 2nd link part 403 also becomes high.

  Moreover, the rotation effect part 403b does not need to be an elongated shape, and may be, for example, a circle or a square.

  (C5) In the above embodiment, in the second decoration device 233, the reverse rotation restricting means such as the reverse rotation stopper 469 and the upper cover body 465 are provided in the main body 401. The first link unit 402 and the second link unit 403 may be provided. For example, the convex part which protruded toward the 2nd link part 403 from the 1st link part 402 is set as the structure used as the reverse rotation control means. In this configuration, when the rotation effect portion 403b is at the retracted position PB1, the reverse rotation restricting means abuts on the side surface of the second link portion 403 opposite to the effect position PB2, so that the first link portion 402 is The rotation of the second link part 403 is restricted.

  (C6) In the above embodiment, in the second link unit 403 of the second decoration device 233, the effect driving unit 475 is disposed on the opposite side of the effect shaft unit 407 across the third shaft unit 406. The drive part 475 should just be arrange | positioned in the position which does not overlap with the production | presentation axial part 407 or the 3rd axial part 406. FIG. For example, it is assumed that the effect driving unit 475 is disposed between the effect shaft portion 407 and the third shaft portion 406. Even in this configuration, the effect drive unit 475 is arranged side by side with the effect shaft unit 407 and the third shaft unit 406 in the direction intersecting the axis line of the effect drive unit 475, and thus the thickness dimension of the second link unit 403 Can be reduced.

  (C7) In the above embodiment, when the second special effect is executed, the effect driving unit 475 starts driving after the rack 493 reaches the unlocked position LB3 with the start of driving of the link driving unit 442. However, the effect driving unit 475 may start driving when a predetermined time has elapsed after the link driving unit 442 starts driving. In short, the effect driving unit 475 may start driving after the rotation restriction by the lock mechanism is released.

  In the above-described embodiment, the effect driving unit 475 starts driving after the link driving unit 442 starts driving. However, the driving units 442 and 475 may start driving simultaneously. In this case, it is preferable that the rotation effect unit 403b does not contact other devices on the back side of the game board 60a even if the rotation effect unit 403b starts to rotate at the retracted position PB1.

  Even if the rotation effect unit 403b at the retreat position PB1 is not at a zero angle, if the rotation effect unit 403b does not come into contact with other devices, the link drive unit 442 starts after the effect drive unit 475 starts to rotate. You may start rotation. That is, the second link unit 243 may start to rotate after the rotation effect unit 403b starts to rotate. Further, when the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state, the rotation effect unit 403b may extend in a direction intersecting the second link unit 403. Further, when the second special effect is ended, the rotation effect unit 403b is moved to the retracted position PB1 by driving the link drive unit 442, and then the effect drive unit 475 is rotated to zero the rotation effect unit 403b. You may make it shift to an angle.

  (D1) When the second decoration device 233 is in the retracted state, the rotation restricting member 511 is hooked on the rack receiving portion 521 to restrict the rotation of the first link portion 402 and the second link portion 403. The link portions 402 and 403 may be rotated by their own weight. For example, when the second decoration device 233 is disposed at a position above the central opening 72 and the rotation restriction caused by the rotation of the rotation restriction member 511 and the rack receiving portion 521 is released, the rotation effect part 403b is moved to the central opening 72. The links 402 and 403 start to rotate in the direction of moving to the (effect position PB2) side. In this case, the link driving unit 442 and the spring member 451 may not be provided.

  (D2) In the above embodiment, in the second decoration device 233, the rotation restricting member 511 is disposed on the back side of the rack 493, but the rotation restricting member 511 is disposed on the front side of the rack 493. Alternatively, the racks 493 may be arranged side by side. For example, in a configuration in which the rotation restricting members 511 are arranged side by side on the rack 493, it is preferable that the rack receiving portion 521 protrudes laterally from the rack 493 toward the rotation restricting member 511 side.

  (D3) In the above embodiment, in the second decoration device 233, the first displacement portion is the restriction hooking portion 515 of the rotation restricting member 511, and the second displacement portion is the rack receiving portion 521 of the rack 493. The first displacement portion may be provided on a member that is displaced as the first link portion 402 is rotated, and the second displacement portion is a member that is displaced as the second link portion 403 is rotated. What is necessary is just to be provided. For example, the first displacement portion is provided in the first link portion 402 and the second displacement portion is provided in the rack 493. In this configuration, the rack 493 is arranged so as to overlap the first shaft portion 404 in the thickness direction of the main body portion 401 regardless of the rotation state of the link portions 402 and 403, and the rotation effect portion 403b moves to the retreat position PB1. As a result, the second displacement portion of the rack 493 is caught by the first displacement portion of the first link portion 402.

  (D4) In the above embodiment, in the second decoration device 233, the rotation restricting member 511 and the rack 493 are housed inside the main body 401, but the rotation restricting member 511 and the rack 493 are included in the main body 401. It may be arranged on the front side or the back side.

  (E1) In the above embodiment, the first decoration device 232 and the second decoration device 233 are arranged on the side of the central opening 72. However, these decoration devices 232 and 233 are arranged above and below the central opening 72. May be. In this configuration, in the decoration devices 232 and 233, the movement effect unit 243b and the rotation effect unit 403b move in the gaming machine height direction, not in the gaming machine width direction. In this case, the retreat positions PA1 and PB1 and the effect positions PA2 and PB2 are not arranged side by side but are arranged vertically.

  (E2) In the above embodiment, in the decoration devices 232 and 233, when the movement effect unit 243b and the rotation effect unit 403b are at the retracted positions PA1 and PB1, the whole is hidden behind the game board 60a. However, even when the movement effect unit 243b and the rotation effect unit 403b are at the retreat positions PA1 and PB1, at least a part of the movement effect unit 243b and the rotation effect unit 403b may not be hidden behind the game board 60a. Even in this case, it is possible to increase the degree of attention with respect to the moving effect part 243b and the rotation effect part 403b that move because the effect positions PA2 and PB2 are set closer to the center of the central opening 72 than the retreat positions PA1 and PB1. .

  (E3) The constituent elements of the first decoration device 232 and the second decoration device 233 may be combined. For example, the configuration of the second decoration device 233, which is a rotatable rotation effect unit 403b and an effect drive unit 475 that applies a driving force to the rotation effect unit 403b, may be mounted on the first decoration device 232. In addition, the configuration of the second decoration device 233 in which the rotation of the first link portion 402 and the second link portion 403 is restricted by the rotation restriction member 511 being caught by the rack receiving portion 521 is the first decoration device 232. It may be mounted on.

  (E4) Other types of pachinko machines different from the above embodiment, such as a pachinko machine in which the electric game object is released a predetermined number of times when a game ball enters the specific area of the special device, or a game ball in the specific area of the special device The present invention can also be applied to a pachinko machine that generates a right if a player enters, a pachinko machine equipped with other objects, an arrangement ball machine, a sparrow ball, and the like.

  Also, a non-ball-type gaming machine, for example, a plurality of reels with a plurality of types of symbols attached in the circumferential direction, starts rotation of the reel by inserting a medal and operating a start lever, and a stop switch is operated. If a specific symbol or a combination of specific symbols is established on the effective line visible from the display window after the reel has stopped after a predetermined time has passed, a privilege such as paying out medals is given to the player The present invention can also be applied to a slot machine.

Further, the gaming machine main body supported by the outer frame so as to be openable and closable is provided with a storage unit and a capture device, and the start lever is operated after a predetermined number of game balls stored in the storage unit are captured by the capture device. Thus, the present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused to start the rotation of the reel.
<Invention Group Extracted from the Embodiments>
Hereinafter, the features of the invention group extracted from the above-described embodiment will be described while showing effects and the like as necessary. In the following, for ease of understanding, the corresponding configuration in the above embodiment is appropriately shown in parentheses, but is not limited to the specific configuration shown in parentheses.

<Feature A group>
The invention of the following feature group A is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine has a picture display device that displays a variation of the picture triggered by entering a pitching section provided in the game area, and various effects are displayed on the display screen of this picture display device. In some cases, the attention to the game is improved.

  In addition, for example, by providing an effect means composed of a light emitting part, a movable body, etc. around the display screen, and by giving a predetermined correspondence between the effect by the display of the variation of the pattern and the effect by the effect means, An improved gaming machine has been proposed (see, for example, JP-A-2002-78904).

  Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the production by the production means, there is a limit to the improvement in the degree of attention simply by operating the production means. In view of this, it is conceivable to increase the degree of attention to the production by the production means by expanding the operation range of the production means or diversifying the operation modes of the production means. However, there is a concern that when the expansion of the operation range and the diversification of the operation modes are realized with respect to the production means, the operation speed of the production means decreases, thereby impairing the production effect by the production means. .

Feature A1. A first link portion (first link portion 242) and a second link portion (second link portion 243) are connected to a main body portion (main body portion 241) as a fixed link, and the first link portion and the second link portion. Are connected to each other to form a link mechanism, and a gaming machine provided with a link device (first decoration device 232) having the link mechanism,
The first link part is rotatably connected to the main body part via a first shaft part (first shaft part 244),
The second link portion is rotatably connected to the main body portion via a second shaft portion (second shaft portion 245), and the first link portion is connected to the first shaft portion via a third shaft portion (third shaft portion 246). It is pivotally connected to the link part,
The first shaft portion is a fixed shaft portion fixed to each of the main body portion and the first link portion,
The second shaft portion is a slide shaft portion that is slidable along the main body portion or the second link portion,
The link device is
The gaming machine is configured by at least one of the first link portion and the second link portion, and the first link portion and the second link portion rotate in conjunction with each other with respect to the main body portion. A movement effect unit (movement effect unit 243b) capable of moving to an effect position (effect position PA2) that can be viewed from the front and a retreat position (retreat position PA1) retreated from the effect position;
A first drive section (first drive section 281) for rotating the first link section with respect to the main body section about the fixed shaft section;
A second drive unit (second drive unit 282) that slides the slide shaft unit to rotate the second link unit relative to the main body unit about the slide shaft unit;
A gaming machine characterized by having the following.

  In the feature A1, since the link device has a link mechanism, the moving range of the moving effect unit can be expanded by moving the first link unit and the second link unit in conjunction with each other. It is possible to diversify the operation modes of the units. For this reason, the attention degree with respect to the movement production | presentation part can be raised by moving a movement production | presentation part to an effect position.

  Here, in the link mechanism, the operation speed of the first link unit and the second link unit may be complicated, and the operation speed may be decreased due to the operation of a plurality of members in conjunction with each other. Concerned. When the rotation speed of the first link part and the second link part is slowed down, the moving speed of the moving effect part is also slowed, and the moving effect part is at the effect position even though the link mechanism is adopted to enhance the effect. The production effect by moving will fall.

  Further, in a configuration in which driving force is applied from only one driving unit to the first link unit and the second link unit, one of these link units is a driving link and the other is a driven link. Thus, the driving link enters a state of operating the driven link. In this case, from the viewpoint of operating both the driving link and the driven link, it is preferable to select a motor having a rated torque as large as possible as the driving unit. On the other hand, from the viewpoint of operating these links at a high speed, the rated speed is It is preferable to select a motor or the like as large as possible as the drive unit. Therefore, it is conceivable to manufacture a motor or the like having a large rated torque and rated speed as a dedicated product, but this increases the cost burden.

  On the other hand, according to the feature A1, since the first drive unit and the second drive unit are individually provided for the first link unit and the second link unit, each operation mode of each link unit, etc. It is possible to set motors and the like individually selected according to the first driving unit and the second driving unit. For this reason, it is possible to select a motor or the like having a maximum rated torque as one of the first drive unit and the second drive unit and a motor or the like having a maximum rated speed as the other drive unit. Become. As a result, for the purpose of reducing the cost burden, even if a general-purpose motor, not a dedicated product, is selected as the first drive unit or the second drive unit, the link mechanism for the drive force applied to the link mechanism is reduced. It is possible to ensure the maximum speed necessary to quickly move the movement effect unit to the effect position while securing the torque necessary for operation. Therefore, the degree of attention to the effect of the link device can be preferably improved.

  Feature A2. Of the first drive unit and the second drive unit, one drive unit is a torque drive unit with a rated value of drive torque larger than that of the other drive unit, and the other drive unit is greater than the torque drive unit. The gaming machine according to Feature A1, wherein the gaming machine is a speed driving unit having a large rated value of driving speed.

  According to the feature A2, the rotation of the first link portion and the second link portion can be quickly accelerated by the torque drive unit, and the maximum speed can be improved by the speed drive unit. In other words, since the torque drive unit and the speed drive unit only have to play different roles, a general-purpose motor or the like can be selected as the torque drive unit or the speed drive unit.

  Feature A3. In order to start moving the movement effect unit from the retracted position toward the effect position, there is provided means for starting both the torque drive unit and the speed drive unit (function to execute the process of step S102). The gaming machine according to Feature A2, wherein the gaming machine is characterized in that:

  When the torque drive unit and the speed drive unit start driving the respective rotation shafts together, the rotation speed of the rotation shaft unit is a certain degree from the start of driving due to the higher acceleration of the torque drive unit. Until this period, the torque drive unit is larger than the speed drive unit, but eventually the speed drive unit overtakes the torque drive unit.

  Therefore, according to the feature A3, since the torque driving unit and the speed driving unit are started together, the first link unit and the second link unit are driven by the driving force of the torque driving unit until a certain period from the start of driving. The first link portion and the second link portion are rotated by the driving force of the speed driving unit after the rotation period has passed. In this case, a period until the drive speed of the speed drive unit catches up with the drive speed of the torque drive unit is used as a period for accelerating the speed drive unit. Therefore, the speed of the moving effect unit when the moving effect unit moves from the retracted position to the effect position by selectively using the driving force of the drive unit having the larger drive speed between the torque drive unit and the speed drive unit. Can be achieved.

  Feature A4. In a state where the torque driving unit is driven to move the movement effect unit from the retracted position toward the effect position, the movement effect unit is driven to a drive stop position (intermediate arm 261) before the effect position. When it reaches the position of the movement effect unit 243b in the case of the transition to the folded state, it has means for stopping the torque drive unit (function to execute the process of step S104). A gaming machine according to A2 or A3.

  After the torque drive unit and the speed drive unit start driving, when the torque drive unit precedes the torque drive unit with respect to the rotation speed of the rotary shaft unit, the first link unit and the second link unit are Since it is rotated by the driving force of the speed driving unit, the torque driving unit acts as a power generation brake by being driven and deters the rotation of the first link unit and the second link unit. There is concern that it will exert its power.

  On the other hand, according to the feature A4, after the torque driving unit and the speed driving unit start driving, the driving of the torque driving unit is stopped when the movement effect unit reaches the driving stop position. Can be prevented from serving as a power generation brake. As a result, the rotational speed of the rotary shaft portion is limited by the drive of the torque drive unit after the speed drive unit overtakes the previous torque drive unit. Can be suppressed.

Feature A5. Means for driving the speed driving unit to return the moving effect unit at the effect position to the retracted position (function of executing the process of step S108);
When the movement effect unit reaches the switching position before the retracted position (the position of the movement effect unit 243b when the rack 333 has reached the lowest position LA2) as the speed driving unit is driven, Means for stopping the driving of the speed drive unit (function to execute the process of step S110);
The apparatus according to any one of features A2 to A4, further comprising means for starting the driving of the torque driving unit after the speed driving unit is stopped (a function of executing the process of step S111). Game machines.

  According to the feature A5, when the movement effect unit is moved from the effect position toward the retreat position, the torque drive unit and the speed drive unit are sequentially driven at a timing that does not overlap. The peak value of power consumption can be suppressed as compared with the configuration in which both of the units are driven simultaneously to move the movement effect unit to the retracted position. Suppressing the peak value of power consumption is effective in a game hall where a plurality of the gaming machines are installed.

Feature A6. The first drive unit rotates as the torque drive unit by a predetermined first angle (effect angle of the first drive unit 281) when the movement effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the effect position. A motor,
The second drive unit serves as the speed drive unit when the movement effect unit is moved from the retracted position to the effect position, a predetermined second angle larger than the first angle (the effect of the second drive unit 282). Any one of the features A2 to A5, characterized in that the second motor rotates by an angle) and has a lower rotational torque rating value than the first motor and a higher rotational speed rating value than the first motor. The gaming machine according to item 1.

  According to the feature A6, since the rotation angle necessary for the movement effect unit to move from the retracted position to the effect position is larger in the second motor than in the first motor, the rotation speed of the second motor becomes the rated speed. The rotation angle necessary to reach can be ensured. Thereby, when a movement production | presentation part moves to an production | presentation position, the high speed movement of a movement production | presentation part is realizable by exhibiting the maximum value of the performance which a 2nd motor has.

Feature A7. The link device is
It has a moving member (rack 333) that moves by the driving force of the speed driving unit and slides the second shaft part by moving,
The moving member is
A first push portion (a bottom surface 335b of the hooking hole 335) that pushes the second shaft portion in a direction in which the movement effect portion moves to the effect position;
A second push portion (the ceiling surface 335a of the hook hole 335) that pushes the second shaft portion in a direction in which the movement effect portion returns to the retracted position;
Have
The features of A2 to A6, wherein the second shaft portion is slidable along the moving direction of the second shaft portion between the first push portion and the second push portion. The gaming machine according to any one of the above.

  According to the feature A7, in the configuration in which the driving force of the speed driving unit is applied to the second shaft portion, the second link portion rotates, and the first link portion rotates by the driving force of the torque driving unit. Since the moving member that moves by the driving force of the speed driving unit can move relative to the second shaft portion, it is allowed that the moving speed differs between the moving member and the second shaft portion. it can. In this case, after the speed drive unit and the torque drive unit start driving, the torque drive unit is connected via each link unit during a period when the torque drive unit is faster than the speed drive unit. The moving speed of the second shaft portion that moves by the driving force can be faster than the moving speed of the moving member that moves by the driving force of the speed driving portion. For this reason, for example, unlike the configuration in which the moving member cannot move relative to the second shaft portion, it is avoided that the moving speed of the second shaft portion becomes slower in accordance with the slowness of the driving speed of the speed driving portion. it can. Therefore, it is possible to effectively use the magnitude of the acceleration of the torque drive unit, and to realize the high-speed movement of the movement effect unit immediately after the movement effect unit starts moving.

  Feature A8. The gaming machine according to Feature A7, wherein the moving direction of the second shaft portion relative to the moving member is the same as the moving direction of the moving member.

  According to the feature A8, since the moving direction of the moving member and the moving direction of the second shaft portion coincide with each other, the movement after the driving speed of the speed driving unit overtakes the driving speed of the preceding torque driving unit. In a situation where the first pushing portion of the member pushes the second shaft portion, loss is less likely to occur with respect to the force with which the first pushing portion pushes the second shaft portion. Therefore, the driving force of the speed driving unit can be used efficiently when moving the moving effect unit at a high speed.

Feature A9. The link device is
It has a pinion gear (pinion gear 332) that rotates as the speed drive unit is driven,
The gaming machine according to Feature A7 or A8, wherein the moving member is a long rack (rack 333) having a plurality of teeth meshing with the teeth of the pinion gear.

  According to the feature A9, since the linearly moving rack is the moving member, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which the moving direction of the moving member coincides with the moving direction of the slide shaft portion. In addition, since the driving force of the speed driving unit is applied to the rack via the pinion gear, loss of the driving force is less likely to occur when converting the rotational motion of the speed driving unit to the linear movement of the rack.

  Feature A10. Energizing at least one of the first link portion and the second link portion so as to rotate the first link portion and the second link portion in a direction in which the movement effect portion moves to the effect position. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A9, comprising a biasing means (spring member 291).

  According to the feature A10, in addition to the driving forces of the first driving unit and the second driving unit, the urging force of the urging means is applied to the first link unit and the second link unit. It is possible to further increase the speed when moving to the position.

  In the configuration in which the urging means is applied from the urging means to each link unit in the direction in which the movement effect unit moves to the effect position, the case where the movement effect unit is in the retracted position compared to the case where the move effect unit is in the effect position The biasing force of the biasing means tends to increase. Therefore, when each link part rotates in the direction in which the movement effect part moves to the retreat position, a larger torque is required to rotate each link part as the movement effect part approaches the retreat position.

  Therefore, it is preferable to apply this feature to the feature A5. In this case, in the movement range where the urging force is relatively small (range from the production position to the switching position), each link unit is rotated by the driving force of the speed driving unit, and the movement range (from the switching position is relatively large). In the range up to the retreat position), each link portion is rotated by the driving force of the torque drive portion, so that each link portion can be quickly rotated to move the moving effect portion to the retreat position as quickly as possible.

Feature A11. Means for driving one of the first drive unit and the second drive unit to return the movement effect unit at the effect position to the retracted position (function of executing the process of step S108);
When the movement effect unit has reached the switching position before the retracted position (the position of the movement effect unit 243b when the rack 333 has reached the lowest position LA2), the one that has been driven to the switching position Means for stopping the drive unit (function to execute the process of step S110);
Means (function to execute the process of step S111) for starting the driving of the driving unit that has not been driven to the switching position after the driving unit that has been driven to the switching position has been stopped. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A10, wherein:

  According to the feature A11, since the moving effect unit can be moved from the effect position to the retracted position by sequentially driving the first drive unit and the second drive unit, for example, the first drive unit and the second drive unit. Compared to a configuration in which both of the drive units are driven simultaneously to move the movement effect unit to the retreat position, the peak value of power consumption can be suppressed in a game hall or the like in which a plurality of the game machines are installed.

  Feature A12. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A11, wherein the first driving unit and the second driving unit are both provided in the main body.

  According to the feature A12, since the first drive unit and the second drive unit are mounted on the main body unit, these drive units are compared with the configuration mounted on the first link unit and the second link unit, for example. The link portion can be reduced in weight. In this case, a motor having a small rated torque and a large rated speed can be selected as the first drive unit or the second drive unit, so that the movement speed of the movement effect unit can be improved.

  Feature A13. The gaming machine according to any one of features A1 to A12, wherein the first shaft portion is disposed on an extension line of a movement line of the second shaft portion.

  According to the feature A13, even when the second shaft portion moves to the dead point in the link mechanism, the first drive unit can determine the rotation direction of the first link unit and the second link unit. For this reason, unlike the configuration in which only the driving force of the second driving unit among the first driving unit and the second driving unit is applied to the first link unit and the second link unit, the movement effect unit is in the retracted position. In this case, it is possible to prevent each link unit from rotating in the direction in which the movement effect unit moves to the side opposite to the effect position. Therefore, by utilizing the dead point of the second shaft portion, the first link portion and the second link portion can be appropriately operated even in the link mechanism that secures the moving range of the moving effect portion as much as possible. .

<Feature B group>
The invention of the following feature group B is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine has a picture display device that displays a variation of the picture triggered by entering a pitching section provided in the game area, and various effects are displayed on the display screen of this picture display device. In some cases, the attention to the game is improved.

  In addition, for example, by providing an effect means composed of a light emitting part, a movable body, etc. around the display screen, and by giving a predetermined correspondence between the effect by the display of the variation of the pattern and the effect by the effect means, An improved gaming machine has been proposed (see, for example, JP-A-2002-78904).

  Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the production by the production means, there is a limit to the improvement in the degree of attention simply by operating the production means. In view of this, it is conceivable to increase the degree of attention to the production by the production means by expanding the operation range of the production means or diversifying the operation modes of the production means. However, there is a concern that when the expansion of the operation range and the diversification of the operation modes are realized with respect to the production means, the operation speed of the production means decreases, thereby impairing the production effect by the production means. .

Feature B1. A first link portion (first link portion 242) and a second link portion (second link portion 243) are connected to a main body portion (main body portion 241) as a fixed link, and the first link portion and the second link portion. Are connected to each other to form a link mechanism, and a gaming machine provided with a link device (first decoration device 232) having the link mechanism,
The first link part is rotatably connected to the main body part via a first shaft part (first shaft part 244),
The second link portion is rotatably connected to the main body portion via a second shaft portion (second shaft portion 245), and the first link portion is connected to the first shaft portion via a third shaft portion (third shaft portion 246). It is pivotally connected to the link part,
The first shaft portion is a fixed shaft portion fixed to each of the main body portion and the first link portion,
The second shaft portion is a slide shaft portion that is slidable along the main body portion or the second link portion,
The link device is
The gaming machine is configured by at least one of the first link portion and the second link portion, and the first link portion and the second link portion rotate in conjunction with each other with respect to the main body portion. A movement effect unit (movement effect unit 243b) capable of moving to an effect position (effect position PA2) that can be viewed from the front and a retreat position (retreat position PA1) retreated from the effect position;
The first shaft in the first link portion is pivotally connected to the main body portion via a main body side shaft portion (main body side shaft portion 262) and via a link side shaft portion (link side shaft portion 263). Since the main body and the first link part are connected to each other and pivoted to an intermediate position between the first shaft part and the third shaft part, the first main part with respect to the main body part can be expanded and contracted. An intermediate arm (intermediate arm 261) capable of rotating the link portion;
A telescopic drive unit (first drive unit 281) for applying a driving force to the intermediate arm to extend and contract the intermediate arm;
A gaming machine characterized by having the following.

  In feature B1, since the link device has a link mechanism, the movement range of the movement effect unit can be expanded by moving the first link unit and the second link unit in conjunction with each other. It is possible to diversify the operation modes of the units. For this reason, the attention degree with respect to the movement production | presentation part can be raised by moving a movement production | presentation part to an effect position.

  Here, in the link mechanism, the operation speed of the first link unit and the second link unit may be complicated, and the operation speed may be decreased due to the operation of a plurality of members in conjunction with each other. Concerned. When the rotation speed of the first link part and the second link part is slowed down, the moving speed of the moving effect part is also slowed, and the moving effect part is at the effect position even though the link mechanism is adopted to enhance the effect. The production effect by moving will fall.

  Further, in the structure in which the driving force is applied to the shaft portion as a joint in the link mechanism, it is necessary to apply a large driving force to the shaft portion in order to ensure the torque necessary for rotating the link portion. is there. However, from the viewpoint of applying a large driving force from the driving section to the shaft section, it is preferable to select a motor having a rated torque as large as possible as the driving section, while from the viewpoint of operating the link mechanism at a high speed, the rated speed is It is preferable to select a motor or the like as large as possible as the drive unit. Therefore, it is conceivable to manufacture a motor or the like having a large rated torque and rated speed as a dedicated product, but this increases the cost burden.

  On the other hand, according to the feature B1, the driving force is applied to the intermediate position of the first link portion via the intermediate arm, so that the first shaft portion and the third shaft portion of the first link portion are driven. Compared to the configuration in which a force is applied, the torque for rotating the first link portion is increased by the amount that the connection position of the intermediate arm to the first link portion is separated from the first shaft portion or the third shaft portion. Can be bigger. For this reason, even if a motor having a relatively high rated torque, such as a motor having a relatively high rated torque, is selected as the telescopic drive unit that applies a driving force to the first link unit via the intermediate arm, the first link As a result, it is possible to secure a torque for rotating the part, and accordingly, it is possible to select a part with a fast rated speed as a telescopic drive part. In this case, for the purpose of reducing the cost burden, even if a general-purpose motor instead of a dedicated product is selected as the expansion / contraction drive unit, the driving force applied to the link mechanism is necessary for operating the link mechanism. It is possible to secure a speed necessary to quickly move the movement effect unit to the effect position while securing the torque. Therefore, the degree of attention to the effect of the link device can be preferably improved.

  Feature B2. The gaming machine according to Feature B1, wherein the intermediate arm expands and contracts when a driving force is transmitted from the expansion and contraction driving unit, and rotates the first link unit along with the expansion and contraction.

  According to the feature B2, since the intermediate arm expands and contracts, even if the intermediate arm is connected to the intermediate position of the first link portion, the intermediate arm does not limit the rotation range of the first link portion, and the intermediate arm extends and retracts. It is possible to realize a configuration in which the driving force is transmitted to the first link portion.

  The intermediate arm extends to rotate the first link part in a direction to move the movement effect part to the retracted position, and to shrink to move the movement effect part to the effect position. It is preferable to rotate the first link part. According to this configuration, the movement effect portion is moved toward the effect position by extending the intermediate arm and pushing out the first link portion. In this case, since it is not necessary to arrange the intermediate arm on the side of the effect position with respect to the first link portion, a configuration in which the intermediate arm does not restrict the rotation range of the first link portion can be easily realized.

Feature B3. The intermediate arm is
A first arm portion (first arm portion 264) that rotates about the main body side shaft portion;
A second arm portion (second arm portion 265) that rotates about the link side shaft portion;
An intermediate shaft portion (intermediate shaft portion 266) connecting the first arm portion and the second arm portion in a state in which relative rotation is possible;
The first arm portion and the second arm portion are rotated relative to each other in a direction in which the first arm portion and the second arm portion are folded with respect to the intermediate shaft portion, and relatively in a direction in which the folding is eliminated. The gaming machine according to Feature B2, wherein the gaming machine extends by rotating.

  According to the feature B3, since the intermediate arm expands and contracts by rotating the first arm part and the second arm part around the intermediate shaft part, for example, a motor or the like that performs rotational movement is selected as the expansion / contraction drive part. In such a case, it is possible to easily realize a configuration in which the driving force applied to the intermediate arm is converted into the expansion / contraction motion of the intermediate arm by rotating the rotation shaft portion of the expansion / contraction driving unit. In addition, since the second arm portion rotates when the intermediate arm extends and contracts, even if the second arm portion is connected to the first link portion that also rotates, the second arm portion rotates the first link portion. It is possible to avoid the obstacle to dynamic movement.

Feature B4. The intermediate arm is
When the movement effect unit extends to the effect position, it shifts to an extended state, and when the movement effect unit moves to the retracted position, it shifts to a contracted state, and the intermediate arm enters the contracted state. In some cases, the first arm portion and the second arm portion are folded along each other and extend along the moving direction of the link side shaft portion accompanying the rotation of the first link portion, The gaming machine according to Feature B3, characterized in that the first link unit is restricted from rotating in a direction in which the movement effect unit moves to the effect position.

  According to the feature B4, the intermediate arm can regulate the rotation of the first link portion by shifting to the contracted state. For this reason, for example, even without using a dedicated member that operates independently of the first link portion and the second link portion, the moving effect portion at the retracted position moves unintentionally toward the effect position. Can be regulated. In this case, it is possible to prevent the configuration from becoming complicated in realizing a link mechanism that can appropriately move the movement effect unit.

  Feature B5. The feature B4 is characterized in that, when the intermediate arm is in the contracted state, the second arm portion extends from the first link portion toward the side opposite to the effect position. The gaming machine described.

  According to the feature B5, when the movement effect unit is in the retracted position, the second arm portion extends toward the side opposite to the rotation direction of the first link portion. And the rotation of the 1st link part can be controlled in the state where neither of the 2nd arm part protrudes to the production position side. Moreover, in this case, since the intermediate arm can be expanded and contracted on the opposite side of the effect position across the first link part regardless of the position of the movement effect part, the rotation direction of the first link part can be realized. The intermediate arm can be arranged side by side on the first link portion. Thereby, the thickness dimension of a link apparatus can be reduced compared with the structure by which an intermediate | middle arm is arrange | positioned between a 1st link part and a main-body part, for example. Reducing the thickness dimension of the link device is effective in installing the link device in a limited area inside the gaming machine.

Feature B6. The link device is
A reverse rotation restricting portion (reverse rotation stopper 269) that restricts one of the rotation directions of the second arm portion relative to the first arm portion when the intermediate arm transitions from the contracted state to the extended state. The gaming machine according to Feature B4 or B5, wherein the gaming machine is characterized by having.

  In the intermediate arm, when the intermediate arm shifts from the contracted state to the extended state, the second arm portion can be rotated about both the first shaft portion side and the third shaft portion side around the main body side shaft portion. ing. For this reason, when the telescopic drive unit is driven, when the intermediate arm shifts from the stretched state to the contracted state, the intermediate arm unit extends again from the contracted state unless the drive of the telescopic drive unit stops. Therefore, it is impossible to determine whether the intermediate arm is in an extended state or in a contracted state only by the driving direction of the telescopic drive unit.

  On the other hand, according to the feature B6, since the rotation of the second arm portion is restricted by the reverse rotation restricting portion, the intermediate arm is limited to the case where the telescopic drive portion is driven in a specific direction (forward direction). It expands and contracts only when it is driven in the opposite direction (reverse direction) to the specific direction. Therefore, the expansion / contraction state of the intermediate arm can be properly managed by controlling the drive direction of the expansion / contraction drive unit.

Feature B7. Arm transmission means (first transmission unit 301) for transmitting the driving force of the telescopic drive unit to the second arm unit;
Any one of the features B3 to B6, wherein the intermediate arm expands and contracts when the second arm portion rotates about the main body side shaft portion by a driving force of the expansion and contraction driving portion. The gaming machine according to the item.

  According to the feature B7, since the driving force of the expansion / contraction driving unit is applied to the second arm unit, the arm transmission unit is coupled to each of the rotation shaft unit of the expansion / contraction driving unit and the main body side shaft unit of the second arm unit. It is only necessary to include a gear or the like. In this case, since the extension / contraction drive unit and the arm transmission unit can be mounted on the main body unit, for example, the structure of the link device as compared with the configuration in which the extension / contraction drive unit and the arm transmission unit are mounted on the first link unit. Can be simplified.

Feature B8. The second link unit is configured such that the rotation angle of the second link part with respect to the first link part and the main body part depends on the driving force of the expansion / contraction drive part when the movement effect part moves to the effect position. Transition to a contraction regulation state that is sized to regulate the contraction of the intermediate arm,
Even when the second link portion is in the contraction-restricted state, by transmitting the driving force to the second link portion in the direction in which the movement effecting portion moves to the retracted position, the second link portion is driven to extend and contract. Any one of the characteristics B3 to B7 is characterized in that link transmission means (second transmission unit 302) for shifting to a contraction permission state in which contraction of the intermediate arm is permitted by a driving force of the unit is provided. Game machines.

  According to the feature B8, when the second link portion with respect to the first link portion reaches a predetermined angle, the first link portion is rotated in the direction in which the moving effect portion moves to the retreat position only by contracting the intermediate arm. I can't do it. That is, the movement effect unit is held at the effect position by the intermediate arm. In this case, since the movement production unit at the production position is unintentionally restricted from moving toward the retreat position, even if the drive of the telescopic drive unit is stopped after the movement production unit has moved to the production position, The position of the movement effect unit can be managed appropriately.

  Further, even when the movement effect unit is held at the effect position by the intermediate arm, the driving force is applied from the link transmission means to the second link unit in the direction in which the movement effect unit moves to the retracted position, so that the intermediate arm It is possible to cancel the holding of the position of the movement effect unit. In this way, since the rotation restriction of the first link part by the intermediate arm can be released using a part of the operation of the link mechanism called the rotation of the second link part, for example, it operates independently of the link mechanism. Compared to a configuration in which the position holding of the movement effect unit is canceled by the dedicated member, it is possible to suppress the configuration of the link device from becoming complicated.

Feature B9. The intermediate arm is
The intermediate shaft portion is capable of sliding movement along at least one of the longitudinal directions of the first arm portion and the second arm portion, and has an arm guide portion (arm long hole 265a) for guiding the sliding movement. And
When the second link portion is in the contraction-restricted state, the intermediate shaft portion is arranged in such a direction that the movement effect portion moves to the retracted position by transmission of a driving force from the link transmission means. The game machine according to Feature B8, wherein the game machine is slid along the arm guide portion when the is rotated.

  According to the feature B9, as the case where the intermediate arm expands and contracts, in addition to the case where the first arm portion rotates relative to the second arm portion around the intermediate shaft portion, the first arm portion is the intermediate shaft. In some cases, the second arm part slides along the arm guide part together with the part. Here, when the first arm portion slides in a direction overlapping the second arm portion, the intermediate arm contracts without rotating the second arm portion, so the moving effect portion at the effect position moves to the retreat position. It is possible to rotate the first link portion in the direction to be. Therefore, even when the intermediate arm is in the extended state, the second link portion can be rotated, and as a result, the rotation restriction of the first link portion by the intermediate arm can be released.

  Feature B10. When the second link portion shifts to the contraction-permitted state as the driving force is transmitted from the link transmission means, the first link portion rotates in the direction in which the movement effect portion moves to the retracted position. The game according to the feature B8 or B9, further comprising: a contraction control means (a function of executing the process of step S111) for driving the expansion / contraction drive unit in a direction in which the intermediate arm is contracted to start Machine.

  According to the feature B10, even when the second link portion is in the contraction restricted state, the second link portion is shifted to the contraction permitted state even if the intermediate arm cannot be contracted by the driving force of the contraction driving unit. Thus, the intermediate arm can be contracted by the driving force of the contraction driving unit. In this case, since the contraction drive unit exhibits the driving force in the opposite direction to the case where the movement effect unit is moved to the effect position, the movement effect unit moves toward the retreat position. There is no need to install a dedicated drive unit for moving the to the retracted position. Thereby, also in the structure which controls the rotation of a 1st link part using the structure of a link mechanism, reduction of a cost burden can be aimed at.

Feature B11. Means for stopping transmission of driving force from the link transmission means to the second link part when the second link part shifts to the contraction permission state in accordance with transmission of driving force from the link transmission means ( A function of executing the process of step S110),
The game according to Feature B10, wherein the contraction control unit is configured to start driving the telescopic drive unit after transmission of driving force from the link transmission unit to the second link unit is stopped. Machine.

  According to the feature B11, when the movement effect unit is moved from the effect position to the retracted position, the timing for applying the driving force to the second link portion and the timing for applying the driving force to the intermediate arm do not overlap. Compared with the configuration in which the driving force is simultaneously applied to the second link portion and the intermediate arm, the peak value of power consumption can be suppressed. Suppressing the peak value of power consumption is effective in a game hall where a plurality of the gaming machines are installed.

Feature B12. The second link portion has a protruding portion (a protruding portion 271) protruding from the first shaft portion toward the opposite side of the second shaft portion,
The movement effect part is configured by the second link part including at least the protruding part,
The first link part is located at a position where the movement effect part is inserted between the movement effect part and the main body part when the movement effect part is in the retracted position.
The first link part and the intermediate arm are arranged side by side, and when the movement effect part is in the retracted position, the first link part and the intermediate arm are respectively inserted between the protruding part and the main body part. The gaming machine according to any one of features B1 to B11.

  According to the feature B12, in the configuration in which the movement effect unit is formed by the second link unit, both the first link unit and the intermediate arm are arranged on the back side of the second link unit. Regardless of the position, it is possible to realize a state in which the first link portion and the intermediate arm are hardly visible from the front of the gaming machine.

  In addition, since the intermediate arm is disposed side by side with the first link portion, the thickness dimension of the link device can be reduced as compared with, for example, a configuration in which the intermediate arm is disposed at a position overlapping the first link portion in the front-rear direction. Reducing the thickness dimension of the link device is effective in installing the link device in a limited area inside the gaming machine.

<Feature C group>
The invention of the following feature group C is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine has a picture display device that displays a variation of the picture triggered by entering a pitching section provided in the game area, and various effects are displayed on the display screen of this picture display device. In some cases, the attention to the game is improved.

  In addition, for example, by providing an effect means composed of a light emitting part, a movable body, etc. around the display screen, and by giving a predetermined correspondence between the effect by the display of the variation of the pattern and the effect by the effect means, An improved gaming machine has been proposed (see, for example, JP-A-2002-78904).

  Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the production by the production means, there is a limit to the improvement in the degree of attention simply by operating the production means. In view of this, it is conceivable to increase the degree of attention to the production by the production means by expanding the operation range of the production means or diversifying the operation modes of the production means. However, there is a concern that when the expansion of the operation range and the diversification of the operation modes are realized with respect to the production means, the operation speed of the production means decreases, thereby impairing the production effect by the production means. .

Feature C1. A main body (main body 401) attached to a predetermined attachment target (unit main body 231);
A production arm (link body 403a of the second link portion 403) pivotally connected to the body portion via an arm shaft portion (second shaft portion 405);
An effect position (effect position PB2) that is provided on the turning front end side of the effect arm and becomes visible from the front of the gaming machine as the effect arm rotates, and a retreat position (retreat position) retreated from the effect position A movement effect unit (rotation effect unit 403b) capable of moving to position PB1),
A game machine provided with a presentation device (second decoration device 233) having
The moving effect part is rotatably connected to the effect arm via an effect axis part (effect axis part 407),
The stage device is
An arm driving unit (link driving unit 442) for rotating the effect arm with respect to the main body unit about the arm shaft unit;
An effect drive unit (effect drive unit 475) for rotating the movement effect unit relative to the effect arm around the effect axis unit;
A gaming machine characterized by having the following.

  In the feature C1, since the turnable movement effect unit is attached to the turnable effect arm, the movement range of the movement effect unit is extended by operating both the effect arm and the movement effect unit. In addition, it becomes possible to diversify the operation mode of the movement effect unit. For this reason, the attention degree with respect to the movement production | presentation part can be raised by moving a movement production | presentation part to an effect position.

  Here, in the configuration in which the movement effect unit is provided on the rotation tip side of the effect arm, there is a concern that the rotation speed of the effect arm becomes slow due to the weight of the movement effect unit or the like. The slowing down of the effect arm rotation speed means that the moving effect part moves slowly, and the moving effect part is arranged on the tip side of the effect arm in order to enhance the effect. The production effect due to the movement of the part to the production position is reduced.

  Further, for example, in a configuration in which the driving of the effect arm and the rotation of the moving effect unit are performed by the driving force of one driving unit, in order to ensure the torque necessary to operate both the effect arm and the moving effect unit It is necessary to apply a large driving force to the effect arm and the movement effect unit. However, from the viewpoint of operating both the production arm and the movement production unit, it is preferable to select a motor having a rated torque as large as possible as the drive unit, while speeding up the rotation of the production arm and the rotation of the movement production unit. In view of this, it is preferable to select a motor having a rated speed as large as possible as the drive unit. Therefore, it is conceivable to manufacture a motor or the like having a large rated torque and rated speed as a dedicated product, but this increases the cost burden.

  On the other hand, according to the feature C1, since the driving force is individually applied from the arm drive unit and the effect drive unit to the effect arm and the movement effect unit, each operation mode of the effect arm and the movement effect unit, etc. It is possible to set motors or the like individually selected according to the above as the arm drive unit and the effect drive unit. For this reason, it is possible to select a motor or the like having a maximum rated torque as the arm drive unit, and a motor or the like having a maximum rated speed as the production drive unit. In this case, for the purpose of reducing the cost burden, even if a general-purpose motor, not a dedicated product, is selected as the arm drive unit or the production drive unit, it is possible to move while ensuring the torque necessary to operate the production arm. It is possible to ensure the rotation speed necessary for enhancing the effect of the effect produced by the rotation of the effect unit.

  Moreover, when the effect arm rotates toward the effect position, the rotational effect of the moving effect unit is increased by rotating the moving effect unit in accordance with the direction of rotation of the effect arm. Can be used. For example, by rotating the moving effect unit in the same direction as the moving direction on the rotation tip side of the effect arm, the movement of the effect arm on the rotation tip side is easily accelerated by the rotation of the movement effect unit. In this case, since the movement effect unit appears at the effect position at high speed, the effect of the move effect unit can be enhanced.

  As described above, the degree of attention to the effect of the effect device can be preferably improved.

  Feature C2. When the arm drive unit is driven to move the movement effect unit from the retracted position toward the effect position, the same direction as the direction in which the effect arm rotates in accordance with the drive of the arm drive unit The game machine according to Feature C1, further comprising: rotation start means (a function of executing the process of step S204) for driving the effect drive unit so that the movement effect unit rotates.

  According to the feature C2, when the movement effect unit starts moving toward the effect position, the rotation direction of the movement effect unit is the same as the rotation direction of the effect arm. The rotation of the production arm can be accelerated.

  Feature C3. The movement effect part is formed in a long shape, and extends in the effect arm when the movement effect part is at the retracted position, and one end of the movement effect part is rotated by the effect arm rather than the effect shaft part. The gaming machine according to Feature C2, wherein the gaming machine is held in a posture projecting toward a distal end side.

  According to the feature C3, when the moving effect unit is stored in the retracted position, the moving effect unit overlaps the effect arm along the effect arm, so that the moving effect unit extends in a direction intersecting the effect arm. The storage space for the effect arm and the movement effect unit can be reduced as compared to the configuration stored in a closed state.

  In addition, when the movement effect unit is in the retracted position, the upper end portion of the movement effect unit is disposed at a position protruding from the upper end portion of the effect arm toward the rotation tip side, so that the separation distance from the arm shaft portion The upper end portion of the moving effect portion is larger than the upper end portion of the effect arm. In this case, for example, the upper end of the moving effect unit moves with the rotation of the moving effect unit, as compared with the configuration in which the upper end portion of the moving effect unit is arranged closer to the effect shaft than the upper end portion of the effect arm. In this case, since the inertial force generated at the upper end portion becomes large, the rotation speed of the effect arm can be increased.

  Feature C4. The game machine according to Feature C3, wherein the effect shaft portion is disposed at a central portion in a longitudinal direction of the movement effect portion.

  According to the feature C4, it can suppress that the gravity center of the movement production | presentation part moves with rotation of a movement production | presentation part. In this case, in the configuration in which the moving effect unit rotates while the effect arm rotates, since the rotation speed of the effect arm is prevented from increasing or decreasing due to the movement of the center of gravity of the moving effect unit, the effect arm is in a stable state. Can be rotated.

Feature C5. In order to move the movement effect unit from the retracted position toward the effect position, a means for starting driving the arm drive unit (a function of executing the process of step S202) is provided.
The game machine according to C4, wherein the rotation start means starts driving the effect drive unit to rotate the movement effect unit after the arm drive unit is started to drive. .

  In the configuration in which the production shaft part is arranged in the central portion of the movement production unit, when the movement production unit is rotated in the retracted position, the lower end portion of the movement production unit sandwiches the movement production unit inside the gaming machine. There is a concern that it may come into contact with other devices or the like arranged on the opposite side of the performance position.

  On the other hand, according to the feature C5, after the effect arm starts rotating in the direction in which the movement effect unit moves to the effect position, rotation of the movement effect unit is started. In this case, since the movement effect unit rotates at a position away from other devices and the like, it is possible to suppress the lower end portion of the movement effect unit from contacting other devices and the like. That is, it can suppress that a movement production | presentation part, another apparatus, etc. are damaged or deform | transformed.

Feature C6. The arm shaft part is slidable along the main body part,
The production device has a configuration in which the production arm rotates with respect to the main body unit as the arm shaft portion slides.
The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C5, wherein the arm driving unit is configured to slide the arm shaft portion.

  In the feature C6, the movement range of the movement effect unit can be expanded by the arm shaft portion slidingly moving along the main body portion. Thereby, the attention degree with respect to a movement production | presentation part can further be raised.

  Here, in the configuration in which the arm shaft portion slides by the driving force of the arm drive unit, it is considered preferable to select a motor having a rated speed as high as possible as the arm drive unit in order to move the moving effect unit at a high speed. . However, in motors with a large rated speed, the rated torque tends to be small, and when this motor or the like is selected as the arm drive unit, when the effect arm starts rotating from the state where the movement effect unit is in the retracted position, There is a concern that the acceleration of the arm will be reduced.

  On the other hand, since this feature is applied to a configuration in which the rotation speed of the effect arm is increased using the rotational force of the movement effect unit, the movement effect unit is rotated in accordance with the start of rotation of the effect arm. Thus, the acceleration of the turning of the effect arm can be increased. Thereby, even if a motor or the like having a low rated speed is selected as the arm drive unit, the shortage of the rated torque of the motor or the like can be compensated by the rotational force of the movement effect unit.

Feature C7. The stage device is
A first link portion (first link portion 402) and a second link portion (second link portion 403) are connected to the main body portion as a fixed link portion, and the first link portion and the second link portion are mutually connected. It has a link mechanism configured by being connected,
The first link part is rotatably connected to the main body part via a first shaft part (first shaft part 404),
The second link part has the effect arm and the movement effect part,
The effect arm is rotatably connected to the main body through the arm shaft as a second shaft (second shaft 405), and through a third shaft (third shaft 406). The game machine according to any one of features C1 to C6, wherein the game machine is rotatably connected to the first link portion.

  According to the feature C7, in the effect device, the structure in which the effect arm rotates with respect to the main body part with the slide movement of the arm shaft part can be realized by constructing the link mechanism. In the link mechanism, it is possible to extend the moving range of the moving effect unit and diversify the movement mode of the moving effect unit by rotating the first link unit and the second link unit in conjunction with each other. become.

  Feature C8. Rotation of at least one of the effect arm and the first link portion so that the third shaft portion does not move on an extension line in the moving direction of the second shaft portion when the movement effect portion is in the retracted position. The gaming machine according to C7, further comprising reverse rotation restricting means (reverse rotation stopper 469, upper cover body 465) for restricting the movement.

  In the link mechanism in which the first link unit and the second link unit rotate in conjunction with each other, each link unit may rotate in a direction in which the movement effect unit at the retracted position moves to the side opposite to the effect position. There is. In this case, there is a concern that the second link part or the first link part including the movement effect part may contact other devices or the like disposed on the opposite side of the effect position with the movement effect part interposed in the gaming machine. Is done.

  On the other hand, according to the feature C8, since the rotation of the first link portion and the second link portion is restricted by the reverse rotation restricting means, the moving effect portion at the retracted position is on the side opposite to the effect portion. It is possible to prevent the effect arm included in the second link portion from rotating in the moving direction. Thereby, it can suppress that a 2nd link part or a 1st link part contacts another apparatus etc. That is, it is possible to prevent the link mechanism and other devices from being damaged or deformed.

Feature C9. The reverse rotation restricting means is
A first restricting portion (reverse rotation stopper 469) for restricting rotation of the effect arm by contacting a portion of the effect arm between the third shaft portion and the arm shaft portion;
A second restricting portion (upper cover body 465) for restricting rotation of the effect arm by contacting a portion of the effect arm opposite to the arm shaft portion across the third shaft portion;
A gaming machine according to Feature C8, wherein:

  According to the feature C9, in the effect arm, the first restriction portion abuts on a portion closer to the rotation base end than the third shaft portion, and the second restriction is placed on a portion closer to the rotation distal end than the third shaft portion. Since the rotation is regulated by the contact of the parts, the reverse rotation of the effect arm can be more reliably suppressed.

  Feature C10. Energizing at least one of the first link portion and the second link portion so as to rotate the first link portion and the second link portion in a direction in which the movement effect portion moves to the effect position. The gaming machine according to any one of features C7 to C9, comprising a biasing means (spring member 451).

  According to the feature C10, since the urging force of the urging means is applied to the first link unit and the second link unit in addition to the driving force of the arm drive unit and the rotational force of the movement effect unit, the movement effect unit is in the effect position. It is possible to further increase the speed when moving to the position.

  Feature C11. In the effect arm, the effect drive unit and the effect axis unit are provided side by side along a direction intersecting the axial direction of the effect axis unit, and the effect drive unit and the effect axis unit The game according to any one of features C1 to C10, wherein an effect transmission unit (effect transmission unit 476) that transmits the driving force of the effect drive unit to the effect shaft unit is provided in between. Machine.

  According to the feature C11, in the effect arm, the movement effect unit and the effect driving unit are arranged at positions that do not overlap with each other along the axis direction of the effect axis portion. The thickness dimension of the rendering device can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which the section and the rendering drive section are arranged at overlapping positions. Reducing the thickness dimension of the rendering device is effective in installing the rendering device in a limited area inside the gaming machine.

  Feature C12. The gaming machine according to Feature C11, wherein the effect driving unit is disposed at a position that does not overlap the movement effect unit regardless of a rotation angle of the movement effect unit in the axial direction of the effect axis unit.

  According to the feature C12, since the separation distance between the effect shaft part and the effect drive part is larger than the rotation radius of the moving effect part, the distance is smaller than the rotation radius of the movement effect part. The thickness dimension of the rendering device can be reduced.

<Feature D group>
The invention of the following feature group D is effective for the following problems.

  A gaming machine such as a pachinko gaming machine has a picture display device that displays a variation of the picture triggered by entering a pitching section provided in the game area, and various effects are displayed on the display screen of this picture display device. In some cases, the attention to the game is improved.

  In addition, for example, by providing an effect means composed of a light emitting part, a movable body, etc. around the display screen, and by giving a predetermined correspondence between the effect by the display of the variation of the pattern and the effect by the effect means, An improved gaming machine has been proposed (see, for example, JP-A-2002-78904).

  Here, in order to improve the degree of attention to the production by the production means, there is a limit to the improvement in the degree of attention simply by operating the production means. In view of this, it is conceivable to increase the degree of attention to the production by the production means by expanding the operation range of the production means or diversifying the operation modes of the production means.

  However, when expansion of the operation range and diversification of operation modes are realized for the production means, it is assumed that the arrangement of the production means becomes complicated. Moreover, in the configuration in which the effect is enhanced by operating the effecting means, it is also necessary to hold the effecting means in a non-operating state. For example, a dedicated member that operates independently of the effecting means is used. Although the operation of the effect means can be regulated by the dedicated member, the structure of the effect means becomes more complicated.

Feature D1. A first link portion (first link portion 402) and a second link portion (second link portion 403) are connected to a main body portion (main body portion 401) as a fixed link, and the first link portion and the second link portion. Are linked to each other to form a link mechanism, and a game machine provided with a rendering device (second decoration device 233) having the link mechanism,
The first link part is rotatably connected to the main body part via a first shaft part (first shaft part 404),
The second link part is pivotally connected to the main body part via a second shaft part (second shaft part 405), and the first link part via a third shaft part (third shaft part 406). It is pivotally connected to the link part,
The first shaft portion is a fixed shaft portion fixed to each of the main body portion and the first link portion,
The second shaft portion is a slide shaft portion that is slidable along the main body portion or the second link portion,
The stage device is
The gaming machine is configured by at least one of the first link portion and the second link portion, and the first link portion and the second link portion rotate in conjunction with each other with respect to the main body portion. A movement effect unit (rotation effect unit 403b) capable of moving between an effect position (effect effect position PB2) that can be viewed from the front and a retreat position (retreat position PB1) retreated from the effect position;
A first displacement portion (a restriction hooking portion 515 of the rotation restriction member 511) that is displaced along with the rotation of the first link portion;
A second displacement portion (rack receiving portion 521 of the rack 493) that is displaced along with the rotation of the second link portion;
Have
The first linking unit and the second displacing unit are hooked to each other when the moving effect unit is in the retracted position, and the first link unit moves in the direction in which the moving effect unit moves to the effect position. And the game machine characterized by restricting the rotation of the second link part and releasing the restriction of the rotation of each link part by releasing the mutual hooking.

  In feature D1, since the production device has a link mechanism, the movement range of the movement production unit can be expanded by moving the first link unit and the second link unit in conjunction with each other, It is possible to diversify the operation modes of the units. For this reason, the attention degree with respect to the movement production | presentation part can be raised by moving a movement production | presentation part to an effect position.

  Here, in the link mechanism, there is a concern that the configuration becomes complicated due to, for example, operating a plurality of members in conjunction with each other including at least the first link portion and the second link portion. Further, in order to restrict the rotation of the first link portion and the second link portion, when a dedicated member that operates independently of these link portions is added to the link mechanism, the configuration of the link mechanism becomes more complicated. End up. In addition, in order to operate the dedicated member in a mode different from the first link unit and the second link unit, it is necessary to operate the dedicated member by a drive unit different from the drive unit that operates the link unit. The operation control of the mechanism is also complicated.

  On the other hand, according to the feature D1, the first displacement portion that is displaced with the rotation of the first link portion and the second displacement portion that is displaced with the rotation of the second link portion are caught with each other. Therefore, the rotation of the first link portion and the second link portion can be restricted without attaching a dedicated member that operates independently of these link portions to the link mechanism. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the configuration and operation of the link mechanism from becoming complicated.

  In addition, since the first displacement unit and the second displacement unit are in a state of being hooked with each other when the movement effect unit moves to the retreat position, the first link unit and the second displacement unit in the direction in which the movement effect unit moves to the effect position. It can control that two link parts rotate unintentionally. For this reason, it becomes possible to limit to the case where the movement effect part is intended to move to the effect position, and the expectation of the game with respect to the game can be enhanced by the movement effect part moving.

  As described above, the degree of attention to the effect by the link mechanism can be preferably improved.

Feature D2. The stage device is
A moving member (rack 493) that slides together with the second shaft portion as the second link portion rotates.
A rotating body (rotation restricting member 511) that rotates as the first link portion rotates;
Have
The first displacement portion is provided in the rotating body and is displaced along with the rotation of the rotating body,
The game machine according to Feature D1, wherein the second displacement portion is provided in the moving member and is displaced as the moving member slides.

  In the feature D2, since it is possible to linearly move the second displacement portion in accordance with the moving direction of the second shaft portion, compared to the configuration in which both the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion perform curved motion, A configuration in which the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are hooked to each other at a position where the movement locus of the first displacement portion and the movement locus of the second displacement portion intersect can be easily realized.

  Here, the position where the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are easily caught is a position where the angle at which the movement locus of the first displacement portion and the movement locus of the second displacement portion intersect is approximately 90 degrees. When the movement trajectories of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are both curves, for example, for each of the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion, the position of the movement trajectory and the angle of the movement trajectory at that position It is necessary to calculate the position where the movement locus of the first displacement part and the movement locus of the second displacement part are orthogonal to each other. For this reason, we are anxious about the work which sets the relative operation mode of the 1st displacement part and the 2nd displacement part becoming complicated.

  On the other hand, according to this feature, since the movement locus of the second displacement portion is linear, the movement locus angle of the second displacement portion is the same in any part. In this case, since the position of the movement locus and the angle of the movement locus at that position need to be associated only with the second displacement portion, the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion move respectively. It is easy to realize a configuration in which the loci are hooked at positions where the trajectories are orthogonal to each other. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the complicated work of setting the positional relationship between the rotating body and the moving member and the relative operation mode between the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion.

Feature D3. The movement effect part moves toward the retracted position when the first link part and the second link part rotate in a direction in which the second shaft part moves away from the first shaft part. ,
The first link portion is disposed at a position spaced from the first shaft portion in a direction intersecting with the arrangement direction of the first shaft portion and the third shaft portion, and the first link portion is rotated. A link displacement portion (bulging connection portion 517) that is displaced along with
The rotating body is disposed at a position separated from the rotating shaft portion (regulating shaft portion 513) of the rotating body, and has a rotating displacement portion (regulating connecting portion 516) that is displaced as the rotating body rotates. And
Since the link displacement portion and the rotation displacement portion are connected by a connection member (connection member 512), the rotation body rotates as the first link portion rotates. A gaming machine according to Feature D2.

  According to the feature D3, since the rotating body is connected to the first link portion via the connecting member, the rotating body can be arranged at a position separated from the first shaft portion. In this case, since it becomes possible to arrange the first displacement portion at a position that overlaps the movement range of the moving member, the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are hooked to each other at a position where the respective movement restrictions intersect. Can be easily realized.

Feature D4. In the rotating body, the rotation shaft portion and the rotation displacement portion are arranged along the alignment direction of the first shaft portion and the link displacement portion,
The gaming machine according to Feature D3, wherein the connecting member extends along an arrangement direction of the first shaft portion and the rotation shaft portion.

  According to the feature D4, the displacement amount of the link displacement portion that is displaced with the rotation of the first link portion can be directly converted into the displacement amount of the first displacement portion. Thus, it is possible to prevent the configuration for displacing the first displacement portion from becoming complicated.

Feature D5. The stage device is
A slide drive unit (link drive unit 442) that slides the second shaft unit to rotate the second link unit with respect to the main body unit;
A pinion gear (pinion gear 492) that rotates as the slide drive unit is driven;
Have
The moving member is a rack having a plurality of teeth meshing with the teeth of the pinion;
The gaming machine according to Feature D3 or D4, wherein the second displacement portion is provided at an end of the rack on the first shaft portion side in the movement direction of the rack.

  According to the feature D5, since the rack that moves linearly is the moving member, the configuration in which the second displacement portion is linearly moved can be easily realized. In addition, since the driving force of the slide drive unit is applied to each of the second shaft unit and the second displacement unit via the rack, for example, a dedicated member for displacing the second displacement unit is provided. In comparison, the configuration of the rendering device can be suppressed from becoming complicated. Further, since the driving force of the rack slide driving unit that slides the second shaft portion is applied to the rack via the pinion gear, the driving force of the sliding driving unit is converted into the linear movement of the rack. Loss is less likely to occur.

Feature D6. The moving member is
A first push portion (a bottom surface 495b of the hook hole 495) that pushes the second shaft portion in a direction in which the movement effect portion moves to the effect position;
A second push portion (the ceiling surface 495a of the hook hole 495) that pushes the second shaft portion in a direction in which the movement effect portion returns to the retracted position;
Have
The second shaft portion is movable along the moving direction of the second shaft portion between the first push portion and the second push portion,
The moving member has a hook position (lowermost position LB2) where the first displacement section and the second displacement section are hooked with each other, and the hook between the first displacement section and the second displacement section is released. To the hook release position (lock release position LB3), and when the movement effect part moves to the retracted position by pushing the second shaft part by the second push part, When the movement effect unit is in the retracted position, the second pressing unit moves in a direction away from the second shaft unit within a range where the first pressing unit does not press the second shaft unit. The game machine according to any one of features D2 to D5, wherein the game machine moves to the hook release position.

  According to the feature D6, when the movement effect unit moves from the retracted position toward the effect position, the operation of releasing the catch between the first displacement unit and the second displacement unit and the first pressing portion of the moving member are the first The operation in which the first link portion and the second link portion start to rotate by pressing the two shaft portions is sequentially performed at a timing that does not overlap. For this reason, the peak value of the driving force required for performing each operation can be reduced as compared with a configuration in which these operations are performed simultaneously. Therefore, a motor or the like having a smaller rated torque can be selected as the driving unit that applies the driving force to the first link unit or the second link unit as much as the peak value is reduced. Thereby, reduction of cost burden can be aimed at.

  Feature D7. The game machine according to Feature D6, wherein the moving direction of the second shaft portion relative to the moving member is the same as the moving direction of the moving member.

  According to the feature D7, since the moving direction of the moving member and the moving direction of the second shaft portion coincide with each other, after the catch between the first displacement portion and the second displacement portion is released, the first of the moving member In a situation where the push portion is pushing the second shaft portion, loss is less likely to occur with respect to the force with which the first push portion pushes the second shaft portion. For this reason, the moving speed of the 2nd axis part can be raised, and, thereby, the high-speed movement of a movement production part is realized and the production effect by the movement production part can be heightened.

  Feature D8. The gaming machine according to any one of features D2 to D7, wherein the rotating body is provided on a side opposite to the first link portion and the second link portion with the moving member interposed therebetween. .

  According to the feature D8, even if the rotating body is arranged at a position overlapping the moving member, the first link portion, and the second link portion in the thickness direction of the rendering device, the rotating body is the first link portion and the second link. It is possible to avoid obstructing the rotation of the part.

Feature D9. Energizing at least one of the first link portion and the second link portion so as to rotate the first link portion and the second link portion in a direction in which the movement effect portion moves to the effect position. Biasing means (spring member 451),
The first displacement portion and the second displacement portion are engaged with each other to restrict the rotation of the first link portion and the second link portion against the urging force of the urging means. The gaming machine according to any one of features D1 to D8.

  According to the feature D9, since the urging force of the urging means is applied to the first link part and the second link part, it is possible to increase the movement speed of the movement effect part from the retreat position to the effect position. Here, in the configuration in which the urging force of the urging means is applied to the first link portion or the second link portion, there is a concern that these link portions may rotate unintentionally due to the urging force. Is in the retracted position, the rotation of each link part is restricted by the first displacement part and the second displacement part being hooked. Therefore, it can suppress that the production effect by a movement production | presentation part falls because the movement production | presentation part in a retreat position moves unintentionally toward the production | presentation position.

  The basic configuration of the gaming machine to which the above features can be applied is shown below.

  Pachinko machine: operation means (game ball launching handle 41) operated by a player, game ball launching means (game ball launching mechanism 110) for launching a game ball based on the operation of the operation means, and the fired A ball path (guidance rail 100) for guiding a game ball to a predetermined game area (game area PE) and game parts arranged in the game area, and a predetermined passing portion (general winning prize) among these game parts A gaming machine that gives a privilege to a player when a game ball passes through the mouth 61 or the like.

  Slot machine, etc .: A variable display means that displays a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols in a variable manner and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. Special game advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operation means for stoppage or when a predetermined time elapses and the final stop symbol at the time of stoppage is a specific symbol A gaming machine that generates a state (bonus game, etc.).

  Ball-use belt-type game machine: Equipped with variable display means that displays the symbol sequence consisting of multiple symbols in a variably displayed state, and then stops and displays the symbol sequence. The special game state (bonus) that is advantageous to the player on the condition that the change of the symbol is stopped due to the operation of the operating means or when the predetermined time elapses, and the final stop symbol at the time of the stop is a specific symbol A throwing device that performs a throwing process for taking in a game ball from the ball tray and a payout device for paying out the game ball to the ball tray, A gaming machine configured such that the operation of the starting operation means is made effective when a game ball is inserted by.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 10 ... Pachinko machine as game machine, 231 ... Unit main body as attachment object, 232 ... First decoration device as link device, 233 ... Second decoration device as production device, 241 ... Main body portion, 242 ... First link , 243 ... second link part, 243b ... movement effect part, 244 ... first shaft part, 245 ... second shaft part, 246 ... third shaft part, 261 ... intermediate arm, 262 ... main body side shaft part, 263 ... Link side shaft portion, 264 ... first arm portion, 265 ... second arm portion, 265a ... arm long hole as arm guide portion, 266 ... intermediate shaft portion, 269 ... reverse rotation stopper as reverse rotation restricting portion, 271 ... Projection part, 281 ... First drive part as an expansion / contraction drive part, 282 ... Second drive part, 291 ... Spring member as biasing means, 301 ... First transmission part as arm transmission means, 332 ... Pinion gear 333: Rack as moving member, 335 ... Hook hole, 335a ... Ceiling surface as first pushing portion, 335b ... Bottom surface as second pushing portion, 401 ... Main body portion, 402 ... First link portion, 403 ... Second Link unit, 403a ... Link unit main body 403a as a production arm, 403b ... Rotation production unit as a movement production unit, 404 ... First shaft unit, 405 ... Second shaft unit as arm shaft unit, 406 ... Third shaft unit , 407 ... Production shaft part, 442 ... Link drive part as slide drive part and arm drive part, 451 ... Spring member as urging means, 465 ... Upper cover as second restriction part constituting reverse rotation restricting means Body, 469 ... reverse rotation stopper as a first restricting portion constituting the reverse rotation restricting means, 475 ... effect driving portion, 476 ... effect transmitting portion, 492 ... pinion gear, 493 ... moving member 495 ... Hook hole, 495a ... Ceiling surface as the second pushing portion, 495b ... Bottom surface as the first pushing portion, 511 ... Rotation restricting member as the rotating body, 512 ... Connection member, 513 ... times Restriction shaft portion as a moving shaft portion, 515... Restriction hooking portion as a first displacement portion, 516... Restriction connection portion as a rotation displacement portion, 517 ... Swelling connection portion as a link displacement portion, 521. Rack receiving part as a part, LB2 ... lowest position as a hooking position, LB3 ... unlocking position as a hook releasing position, PA1 ... retraction position of the movement effecting part 243b, PA2 ... effect position of the moving effecting part 243b, PB1 ... The retraction position of the rotation effect unit 403b, PB2 ... the effect position of the rotation effect unit 403b.

Claims (9)

A main body attached to a predetermined attachment object;
A production arm that is pivotally connected to the main body via an arm shaft,
Provided on the turning tip side of the effect arm, and as the effect arm rotates, it is possible to move to an effect position that is visible from the front of the gaming machine and a retreat position that is retracted from the effect position. A moving direction department,
A game machine provided with a production device having
The moving effect part is rotatably connected to the effect arm via an effect shaft part,
The stage device is
An arm driving section for rotating the effect arm with respect to the main body section about the arm shaft section;
An effect drive unit that rotates the movement effect unit with respect to the effect arm with the effect axis unit as an axis,
A gaming machine characterized by having the following.   When the arm drive unit is driven to move the movement effect unit from the retracted position toward the effect position, the same direction as the direction in which the effect arm rotates in accordance with the drive of the arm drive unit The game machine according to claim 1, further comprising a rotation start unit that drives the effect driving unit so that the movement effect unit rotates.   The movement effect part is formed in a long shape, and extends in the effect arm when the movement effect part is at the retracted position, and one end of the movement effect part is rotated by the effect arm rather than the effect shaft part. The gaming machine according to claim 2, wherein the gaming machine is held in a posture protruding toward the tip side.   The gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the effect shaft portion is disposed at a central portion in a longitudinal direction of the movement effect portion. Means for starting to drive the arm drive unit in order to move the movement effect unit from the retracted position toward the effect position;
5. The game according to claim 4, wherein the rotation start unit starts driving the effect drive unit to rotate the movement effect unit after the arm drive unit is started to drive. Machine. The arm shaft part is slidable along the main body part,
The production device has a configuration in which the production arm rotates with respect to the main body unit as the arm shaft portion slides.
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the arm driving unit is configured to slide the arm shaft portion. The stage device is
A first link portion and a second link portion connected to the main body portion as a fixed link portion, and a link mechanism configured by connecting the first link portion and the second link portion to each other; And
The first link part is rotatably connected to the main body part via a first shaft part,
The second link part has the effect arm and the movement effect part,
The effect arm is pivotally connected to the main body via the arm shaft as a second shaft, and is pivotally connected to the first link via a third shaft. The gaming machine according to any one of claims 1 to 6, characterized in that:   In the effect arm, the effect drive unit and the effect axis unit are provided side by side along a direction intersecting the axial direction of the effect axis unit, and the effect drive unit and the effect axis unit The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 7, further comprising an effect transmission unit that transmits the driving force of the effect drive unit to the effect shaft unit.   The gaming machine according to claim 8, wherein the effect driving unit is arranged at a position that does not overlap the movement effect unit regardless of a rotation angle of the movement effect unit in the axial direction of the effect shaft unit. .

Images